Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

С английского на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

reference+only

Толкование Перевод

21 εἰς

εἰς or [full] ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in Hom., [dialect] Ion. poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in Hdt. and Hp., and is found in nearly all early [dialect] Ion. Inscrr. (exc. IG12(8).262.16 (Thasos, v B. C.), ib.7.235.1 (Oropus, iv B. C.)); εἰς in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. from iv B. C., IG2.115, etc.; and usu. in [dialect] Att. Prose (exc. Th.) and Com. (exc. in parody): Trag. apptly. prefer εἰς, but ἐς is used before vowels metri gr.; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω) , ἐς μακαρίαν. [dialect] Aeol. poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in Hom. by An.Ox. 1.172, cf. Hellad. ap. Phot.Bibl.p.533B. (Orig. ἐνς, as in IG4.554.7 ([place name] Argos), GDI4986.11 ([place name] Crete); cf. ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in [dialect] Aeol. εἰς, but spurious in [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion.) Radical sense

A into, and then more loosely, to:

I OF PLACE, the oldest and commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Il.1.141, al.; εἰς ἅλαδε Od.10.351
; ἔς ῥ' ἀσαμίνθους 4.48
; ἐς οἶνον βάλε φάρμακον ib. 220; freq. of places, to, εἰς Εὔβοιαν 3.174
; ἐς Αἴγυπτον, etc., Hdt.1.5, etc.; ἐς Μίλητον into the territory of Miletus, ib.14; εἰς Ἑλλήσποντον εἰσέπλει X.HG1.1.2
; ἀφίκετο εἰς Μήδους πρὸς Κυαξάρην Id.Cyr.2.1.2
; εἰς ἅρματα βαίνειν to step into.., Il.8.115; εἰς ἐλάτην ἀναβῆναι 14.287
; opp. ἐκ, in such phrases as ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης, ἐς πόδας ἐκ κεφαλῆς, from heel to ankle-joint, from head to foot, 22.397, 23.169; ἐκ πάτου ἐς σκοπιήν 20.137
; ἐς μυχὸν ἐξ οὐδοῦ Od.7.87
; κἠς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theoc. 18.15: with Verbs implying motion or direction, as of looking, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.3.364
; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, 9.373, etc.; εἰς ὦπα ἔοικεν he is like in face (sc. ἰδόντι), 3.158, etc.; ἐς ὀφθαλμούς τινος ἐλθεῖν to come before another's eyes, 24.204; ἐς ὄψιν ἀπικνέεσθαί τινος Hdt.1.136
; καλέσαι τινὰ ἐς ὄψιν Id.5.106
, etc.; ἐς ταὐτὸν ἥκειν come to the same point, E.Hipp. 273: less freq. after a Subst., ὁδὸς ἐς λαύρην Od.22.128
; τὸ ἐς Παλλήνην τεῖχος facing Pallene, Th.1.56; ξύνοδος ἐς τὴν Δῆλον Id.3.104
, cf.Pl.Tht. 173d.

b [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion., also c. acc. pers. ([dialect] Att. ὡς, πρός, παρά), Il.7.312, 15.402, Od.14.127, Hdt.4.147; also in [dialect] Att. with collective Nouns, ἐς τὸν δῆμον παρελθόντες Th. 5.45
, or plurals, εἰς ὑμᾶς εἰσῆλθον D.18.103
; esp. of consulting an oracle, ἐς θεὸν ἐλθεῖν Pi.O.7.31
; εἰς Ἄμμων' ἐλθόντες Ar.Av. 619
.

2 with Verbs expressing restin a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκεν ἐπὶ θρόνου he put it in the house (i.e. he brought it into the house, and put it there), Od.20.96; ἐς θρόνους ἕζοντο they sat them down upon the seats, 4.51, cf. 1.130; ἐφάνη λὶς εἰς ὁδόν the lion appeared in the path, Il.15.276; ἀπόστολος ἐς τὴν Μίλητον ἦν Hdt.1.21
(s. v.l.); αὐτὸς ἐς Αακεδαίμονα ἀπόστολος ἐγίνετο Id.5.38
; ἐς κώμην παραγίνονται Id.1.185
; παρῆν ἐς Σάρδις Id.6.1
; ἐς δόμους μένειν S.Aj.80
(cod. Laur.); ἐς τὴν νῆσον κατέκλῃσε Th.1.109
, cf. Hdt.3.13; ἀπόβασιν ποιήσασθαι ἐς .. Th.2.33, etc.; later used like ἐν, τὴν γῆν εἰς ἣν ὑμεῖς κατοικεῖτε LXX Nu.35.34; τὸ χρυσίον ὃ εἰλήφεσαν εἰς Ῥώμην D.S.14.117
; οἰκεῖν εἰς τὰ Ὕπατα Luc.Asin.1
; εἰς Ἐκβάτανα ἀποθανεῖν Ael.VH7.8
; εἰς ἅπασαν τὴν γῆν Suid.
s.v. Καλλίμαχος: generally, τοὔνομα εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, φασίν, Ἱππομιγὴς δύναται Ael.VH9.16
.

3 with Verbs of saying or speaking, εἰς relates to the persons to or before whom one speaks, εἰπεῖν ἐς πάντας, ἐς πάντας αὔδα, Hdt.8.26, S.OT93; λέγειν εἰς τὸ μέσον τῶν ταξιάρχων X.Cyr. 3.3.7
; αἱ ἐς τὸ φανερὸν λεγόμεναι αἰτίαι Th.1.23
: with other Verbs, εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληνας σαυτὸν σοφιστὴν παρέχων Pl.Prt. 312a
; καλὸν ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὸ ἀγώνισμα φανεῖσθαι Th.7.56
; ἐπαχθὴς ἦν ἐς τοὺς πολλούς Id.6.54; στρατιὰν ἐπαγγέλλων ἐς τοὺς ξυμμάχους Id.7.17
; διαβεβλῆσθαι εἴς τινα Pl.R. 539c
.

4 elliptical usages,

a after Verbs which have no sense of motion to or into a place, τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρόν they quitted the city for a strong position, i.e. to seek a strong position, X.An.1.2.24; γράμματα ἑάλωσαν εἰς Ἀθήνας letters were captured [and sent] to Athens, Id.HG1.1.23, cf. Pl.R. 468a; ἀνίστασθαι ἐς Ἄργος E.Heracl.59
, cf. Pl.Phd. 116a.

b participles signifying motion are freq. omitted with εἰς, τοῖς στρατηγοῖς τοῖς εἰς Σικελίαν (sc. ἀποδειχθεῖσιν) And.1.11, etc.

c c. gen., mostly of proper names, as εἰς Ἀΐδαο, [dialect] Att. εἰς Ἅιδου [δόμους], Il.21.48; ἐς Ἀθηναίης [ἱερόν] to the temple of Athena, 6.379; ἐς Πριάμοιο [οἶκον] 24.160, cf. 309; εἰς Αἰγύπτοιο [ῥόον] Od.4.581; ἐς τοῦ Κλεομένεος Hdt.5.51
; εἰς Ἀσκληπιοῦ Ar.Pl. 411
; ἐπὶ δεῖπνον [ἰέναι] εἰς Ἀγάθωνος Pl.Smp. 174a
: with Appellatives, ἀνδρὸς ἐς ἀφνειοῦ to a rich man's house, Il.24.482; ἐς πατρός Od.2.195
; πέμπειν εἰς διδασκάλων send to school, X.Lac.2.1; εἰς δ. φοιτᾶν Pl.Prt. 326c
; ἐς σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, Hdt.1.108, 9.108, etc.

II OF TIME,

1 to denote a certain point or limit of time, up to, until, ἐς ἠῶ Od.11.375
; ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα till sunset, 9.161 (but also, towards or near sunset, 3.138); ἐκ νεότητος ἐς γῆρας Il.14.86
; ἐκ παιδὸς ἐς γῆρας Aeschin.1.180
; ἐς ἐμέ up to my time, Hdt.1.92, al.: with Advbs., εἰς ὅτε (cf. ἔς τε) against the time when.., Od.2.99; εἰς πότε; until when ? how long ? S.Aj. 1185 (lyr., cf. εἰσόκἐ; εἰς ὁπότε Aeschin.3.99
; ἐς τί; = εἰς πότε; Il.5.465; ἐς ὅ until, Hdt.1.93, etc.; ἐς οὗ Id.1.67
, 3.31, etc.; ἐς τόδε Id.7.29
, etc.

2 to determine a period, εἰς ἐνιαυτόν for a year, i.e. a whole year, Il.19.32, Od.4.526; within the year, ib.86 (cf. ἐς ἐνίαυτον Alc.Supp.8.12
); εἰς ὥρας Od.9.135
; ἐς θέρος ἢ ἐς ὀπώρην for the summer, i.e. throughout it, 14.384; ἡ εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν κειμένη δαπάνη εἰς τὸν μῆνα δαπανᾶται the expenditure for a year is expended in the month, X.Oec.7.36; μισθοδοτεῖν τινὰς εἰς ἓξ μῆνας D.S.19.15
; χοίνικα κριθῶν εἰς τέσσαρας ἡμέρας διεμέτρει Posidon. 36J.
; εἰς ἑσπέραν ἥκειν to come at even, Ar.Pl. 998; εἰς τρίτην ἡμέραν or εἰς τρίτην alone, on the third day, in two days, Pl.Hp.Ma. 286b, X.Cyr.5.3.27; ἥκειν ἐς τὴν ὑστεραίαν Id.An.2.3.25
; ἥκειν εἰς τὸ ἔαρ Hell.Oxy.17.4
; ἐς τέλος at last, Hdt.3.40; ἐς καιρόν in season, Id.4.139; οὐκ ἐς ἀναβολάς, ἀμβολάς, with no delay, Id.8.21, E.Heracl. 270, etc.; ἐς τότε at this time, v.l. in Od.7.317 (but εἰς τότε at that time (in the [tense] fut.), D.14.24, Pl.Lg. 830b); ἐς ὕστερον or τὸ ὕστερον, Od.12.126, Th.2.20: with Advbs., ἐς αὔριον Il.8.538
, Pl. Lg. 858b; ἔς περ ὀπίσσω Od.20.199
; ἐς αὖθις Th.4.63
(v. εἰσαῦθις (; ἐς αὐτίκα μάλ' Ar. Pax 367; εἰς ἔπειτα (v. εἰσέπειτα (; ἐς τὸ ἔ., Th.2.64; ἐς ὀψέ Id.8.23
; εἰς ἅπαξ, v. εἰσάπαξ; εἰς ἔτι, v. εἰσέτι.

III to express MEASURE OR LIMIT, without reference to Time, ἐς δίσκουρα λέλειπτο was left behind as far as a quoit's throw, Il.23.523; ἐς δραχμὴν διέδωκε paid them as much as a drachma, Th.8.29; ἱματισμὸν ζητῆσαι εἰς δύο τάλαντα Thphr.Char.23.8
; so ἐς τὰ μάλιστα to the greatest degree, Hdt.1.20, etc.; ἐς τοσοῦτο τύχης ἀπίκευ Id.1.124
; εἰς τοσοῦτο ἥκειν Lys.27.10
; εἰς τοῦτο θράσους καὶ ἀναιδείας ἀφίκετο D.21.194
; ἐς ὅ ἐμέμνηντο so far as they remembered, Th.5.66; ἐς τὸ ἔσχατον Hdt.7.229
, etc.; εἰς ἅλις Theoc.25.17
.

2 freq. with Numerals, ἐς τριακάδας δέκα ναῶν A.Pers. 339
; ναῦς ἐς τὰς τετρακοσίας, διακοσίας, to the number of 400, etc., Th.1.74, 100, etc.; εἰς ἕνα, εἰς δύο, εἰς τέσσαρας, one, two, four deep, X.Cyr.2.3.21; but εἰς τέσσαρας four abreast, Aen.Tact.40.6: with Advbs., ἐς τρίς or ἐστρίς thrice, Pi.O.2.68, Hdt.1.86; of round numbers, about, X.An.1.1.10.

3 distributive, εἰς φυλάς by tribes, LXX 1 Ki.10.21, cf. 2 Ki.18.

4

IV to express RELATION, towards, in regard to, ἐξαμαρτεῖν εἰς θεούς A.Pr. 945
, etc.; ἁμάρτημα εἴς τινα, αἰτίαι ἐς ἀλλήλους, Isoc.8.96, Th.1.66; ὄνειδος ὀνειδίζειν εἴς τινα S.Ph. 522
; ἔχθρη ἔστινα Hdt.6.65
; φιλία ἐς ἀμφοτέρους Th.2.9
; λέγειν ἐς .. Hdt.1.86; γνώμη ἀποδεχθεῖσα ἐς τὴν γέφυραν Id.4.98
; ἡ ἐς γῆν καὶ θάλασσαν ἀρχή Th.8.46
.

b of the subject of a work, esp. in titles, e.g. τὰ ἐς Ἀπολλώνιον Philostr. VA
; of the object of a dedication, as in titles of hymns, ἐπινίκια, etc.

2 in regard to, πρῶτος εἰς εὐψυχίαν A.Pers. 326
; σκώπτειν ἐς τὰ ῥάκια Ar. Pax 740
, cf. Eq.90; διαβάλλειν τινὰ ἔς τι Th.8.88
; αἰτία ἐπιφερομένη ἐς μαλακίαν Id.5.75
; μέμφεσθαι εἰς φιλίαν X.An.2.6.30
; εἰς τὰ πολεμικὰ καταφρονεῖσθαι Id.HG7.4.30
; πόλεως εὐδοκιμωτάτης εἰς σοφίαν Pl.Ap. 29d
; in respect of, εὐτυχεῖν ἐς τέκνα E.Or. 542
, cf. Pl.Ap. 35b, etc.; εἰς χρήματα ζημιοῦσθαι Id.Lg. 774b
, cf. D.22.55; ἐς τὰ ἄλλα Th.I.I; εἰς ἄπαντα S.Tr. 489
; ἐς τὰ πάνθ' ὁμῶς A.Pr. 736
; εἰς μὲν ταῦτα Pl.Ly. 210a
; τό γ' εἰς ἑαυτόν, τὸ εἰς ἐμέ, S.OT 706, E. IT 691, cf. S.Ichn.346; ἐς ὀλίγους μᾶλλον τὰς ἀρχὰς ποιεῖν Th.8.53
; ἐς πλείονας οἰκεῖν Id.2.37
; for τελεῖν ἐς Ἕλληνας, Βοιωτούς, ἄνδρας, etc., v. τελέω.

3 of Manner, ἐς τὸν νῦν τρόπον Id.1.6
; τίθεμεν τἆλλα εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον; Pl.R. 353d
; ἐς ἓν μέλος Theoc.18.7
: freq. periphr. for Advbs., ἐς κοινὸν φράζειν, λέγειν, A.Pr. 844, Eu. 408; ἐς τὸ πᾶν, = πάντως, Id.Ag. 682(lyr.); ἐς τάχος, = ταχέως, Ar.Ach. 686; ἐς εὐτέλειαν, = εὐτελῶς, Id.Av. 805; ἐς τἀρχαῖον Id.Nu. 593
; εἰς καλόν S. OT78
, cf. Pl.Phd. 76e; ἐς δέον γεγονέναι Hdt.1.119
, cf. S.OT 1416, and v. δέον.

V ofan end or limit, ἔρχεσθαι, τελευτᾶν, λήγειν ἐς.., to end in.., Hdt.1.120,3.125,4.39, etc.; ἐς ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα ου,ρον ἀνθρώπῳ προτίθημι Id.1.32
; καταξαίνειν ἐς φοινικίδα to cut into red rags, Ar.Ach. 320 (troch.); στρέφειν τι εἰς αἷμα Apoc.11.6
; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐκ μειρακίων τελευτᾶν, εἰς ἄνδρα γενειᾶν, Pl.Tht. 173b, Theoc.14.28; ἐκτρέφειν τὸ σπέρμα εἰς καρπόν X.Oec.17.10
: so with εἶναι or γίγνομαι to form a predicate, ἔσται εἰς ἔθνη LXXGe.17.16
; ἐγενήθη εἰς γυναῖκα ib.20.12; πιστὸς (sc.ἦν) εἰς προφήτην ib.IKi.3.20; ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον Ev.Luc.13.19
,al.

2 of Purpose or Object, εἰπεῖν εἰς ἀγαθόν, πείσεται εἰς ἀγαθόν, for good, for his good, Il.9.102,11.789; εἰς ἀγαθὰ μυθεῖσθαι 23.305
; ἐς πόλεμον θωρήξομαι 8.376
, cf. Hdt.7.29, etc.; ἐς φόβον to cause fear, Il.15.310; ἐς ὑποδήματα δεδόσθαι Hdt.2.98
; κόσμος ὁ εἰς ἑορτάς X.Oec.9.6
; ἐπιτηδεότατος, εὐπρεπής, ἔς τι Hdt.1.115
,2.116; εἰς κάλλος ζῆν to live for show, X.Cyr.8.1.33, cf. Ages. 9.1; ἐς δαίτην ἐκάλεσσε Call.Aet.1.1.5
; εἰς κέρδος τι δρᾶν S.Ph.
III; πάσας φωνὰς ἱέντων εἰς ἀπόφυξιν Ar.V. 562
; εἰς γράμματα παιδὶ δεκετεῖ ἐνιαυτοὶ τρεῖς Pl.Lg. 809e
; εἰς τὸ πρᾶγμα εἶναι to be pertinent, to the purpose, D.36.54; freq. of expenditure on an object, IG22.102.11, 116.41, al.; ἐς τὸ δέον Ar.Nu. 859
, etc.; ἐς δᾷδα ib. 612.

B POSITION: εἰς is sts. parted from its acc. by several words, εἰς ἀμφοτέρω Διομήδεος ἅρματα βήτην Il.8.115
; εἰς δὲ μονάρχου δῆμος ἀϊδρίῃ δουλοσύνην ἔπεσεν Sol.9
: seldom (only in Poets) put after its case, Il.15.59, Od.3.137,15.541, S.OC 126(lyr.): after an Adv., αὔριον ἔς· τῆμος δὲ.. Od.7.318
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰς
22 σφεῖς

σφεῖς,

A FORMS: nom. σφεῖς Hdt.7.168
, Th.5.46,65, X.An. 7.5.9, HG5.2.8, Pl.R. 487c:—the uncontr, form σφέες is never found, cf. A.D.Pron.93.1, though recognized by Greg.Cor.p.479 S.:—the obl. cases only are used by Hom.

2 Gen. σφέων, in Hom. a monosyll., and sts. enclitic, Il.18.311, Od.3.134; poet. σφείων only in Il., and always in phrase ὦσαν ἀπὸ σφείων, 4.535, 5.626, 13.148; σφέων also in Hdt.2.4, 4.35, al.; [dialect] Att. σφῶν IG12.39.67
, al., Th.1.120, al., Antipho 6.23, etc., also in Hom. in the phrase σφῶν αὐτῶν, Il.12.155, 19.302.

3 Dat. σφίσι ([etym.] ν ) or σφισι ([etym.] ν) 4.2, 17.453, 22.288, 474, A. Pr. 481, Hdt.1.4, al., Th.1.19, al., X.HG1.7.5, etc.; more freq. in the forms σφι, σφιν, Il.2.612, 614, al., A.Pr. 254, al., Hdt.1.31, al. (not in [dialect] Att. Prose); in Trag. never σφι; sts. elided σφ', Il.3.300, 8.4, etc.; σφιν also in [dialect] Dor. Prose, SIG56.48 (Argos, v B.C.), IG22.1126.25 (Delph. Amphict., iv B.C.), Schwyzer 92.5 (Argos, iii B.C.), Anon. in PSI9.1091.21:— σφίσι ([etym.] ν) is not enclitic acc. to A.D.Pron.98.12, sts. enclitic acc. to Hdn.Gr.2.42 (who says elsewh. (2.57 ) that pronouns beginning with σφ- are always enclitic); σφι ([etym.] ν) is enclitic, exc. at the beginning of a phrase, as σφὶν δ' αὐτοῖς Hes.Fr.49
(cited by A.D.Pron.98.11).

4 Acc., [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. σφέᾰς (enclit. σφεας) Hom. (v. infr.), Archil.27.2, Hdt.1.4,5, al.; freq. to be pronounced as one long syllable, as in οὐ μέν σφεας ἔτ' ἔολπα Od.8.315
, cf. 480, 13.213, 276; but also as a disyll., Il.12.43, Od.12.225, al.; σφᾰς enclit. in Il.5.567, Parm.1.12, Theoc.21.16, not enclit. in Opp.C.1.471, H.2.231; [dialect] Att. σφᾶς IG12.101.3
, Th.1.24, E.Med. 1378, Or. 1127, etc.; enclit. σφας [ᾱ, cf. S.Ant. 128 (anap.)] S.OT 1470, 1508, OC 486; also σφε Il.19.265, Simon.99, Pi.P.5.86, A.Th. 630 (lyr.), 788 (lyr.), 864 (anap.), S.OT 1505, OC 605, 1669, E.Med. 394, etc.; never in Com. (for Ar.Eq. 1020 is a burlesque oracle), nor in [dialect] Att. Prose; once in Hdt. (7.170, sed leg. σφέας): neut. σφεα (v. infr. 111).

II Rare dialectic forms:—[dialect] Lacon. dat. φιν, EM702.41; used also by Emp.22.3, Call.Dian. 125, 213, Fr. 183, Nic.Th. 725: [dialect] Aeol. dat. and acc. ἄσφι, ἄσφε, Sapph.43, Alc.73: Syrac. dat. and acc. ψιν, ψε, Sophr.93,94, Theoc.4.3; ψε and ψεαυτόνς also Cretan, Rendic.Pont. Accad.Rom. di Arch.7.106, Riv.Fil.58(1930).473; Cret. dat. ψιναυτοῖς Riv.Ist.Arch.2.19
: Arc. dat. σφεις IG5(2).6.10, 18 ([place name] Tegea).-- For the dual v. σφωέ: like other pl. forms σφε can be used with reference to two persons, Il.11.111, Od.8.271, 21.192, 206; so σφεας, Il.11.128.

III Gender:—in Hom. this Pron. has no neut.; in Od.9.70, 10.355, it refers to things, denoted by feminine nouns: but in [dialect] Ion. Prose occurs the neut. pl. σφεα, Hdt.1.46,89, 2.119, 3.53 ( σφε codd.), 7.50, Abyd.9; σφε is acc. pl. neut. in Theoc.15.80.

B MEANINGS:

I they, them, pl. of οὗ B.I, ἐκ γάρ σφεων φρένας εἵλετο Παλλὰς Ἀθήνη Il.18.311
; τῶ σφεων πολέες κακὸν οἶτον ἐπέσπον Od.3.134
; μετὰ δέ σφισι πότνια Ἥβη νέκταρ ἐῳνοχόει Il.4.2
; οὔ σφι θαλάσσια ἔργα μεμήλει 2.614
; ἐγώ σφισιν ἔδειξα κράσεις ἠπίων ἀκεσμάτων A.Pr. 481
, cf. 443, 457, S.OT 1470, al., E.Med. 1378; this use is not found in Prose, exc. in dialects, SIG56.48 (Argos, v B.C.), IG22.1126.25 (Delph. Amphict., iv B.C.), Hdt.1.3, 2.15, al.

b παρὰ δέ σφιν ἑκάστῳ δίζυγες ἵπποι ἑστᾶσι beside each of them, Il.5.195.

2 reflexively, as pl. of οὗ B. 11.1
, ὦσαν ἀπὸ σφείων 4.535
, al.; αἵ ἑ μετὰ σφίσιν εἶχον 22.474
, cf. Th.2.76; later with the same restriction as for οὗ B. 11.1
, e.g. φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη· ἢν γὰρ σφαλῇ, σφεῖς γε οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ δουλεύσουσι τῇ πρώτῃ τῶν ἡμερέων Hdt.7.168
, cf. Th.5.46,65, X.An.7.5.9, HG5.2.8, Pl.R. 487c.

3 oblique cases in combination with αὐτῶν, αὐτούς, etc., forming a reflex. Pron. used without the foreg. restriction, ἐντὸς δὲ πυκάζοιεν σφέας αὐτούς Od.12.225
; σφῶν δ' αὐτῶν κήδε' ἑκάστη Il.19.302
, cf. 12.155; σφᾶς δ' αὐτάς Hes.Th.34
; Κερκυραῖοι σφῶν αὐτῶν τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δοκοῦντας εἶναι ἐφόνευον Th.3.81
, cf. 1.139, al.; it sts. = ἀλλήλους ([etym.] - ων) , ἀλλήλοις κοτέοντες ἐπὶ σφέας ὁρμήσωσι Hes.Sc. 403
; ποθεινοτέρως σφῶν αὐτῶν ἔχειν X.Lac.1.5
; σφᾶς ( σφὰς cod. L) αὐτοὺς.. ἐπέφραδον informed one another, A.R.2.959; but σφᾶς ἑωυτάς is prob. f.l. in Hp.Epid.2.1.3: cf. Thom.Mag.p.329 R.

II as sg., = him, her, in the dat. and acc. forms σφι (ν), σφε; σφιν is so used in h.Pan.19, h.Hom.30.9, A.Pers. 759, S.OC 1490 (in Od.15.524 σφιν refers to all the suitors, and in Hes.Sc. 113 to Ares and Cycnus); σφι in Lyc.1242; σφε = him, her, in Pi.I.6(5).74, A.Pr.9, Th. 469, al., S.OT 761, Ant.44, Ph. 200 (anap.), al., E.Alc. 107 (lyr.), 149, 200, Med.33, al.; = it (of a masc. noun) in S.OC40: f.l. for σφεα in Hdt.3.52,53, and for σφεας Id.1.71, al.

III once as 2 pers. pl. reflex., ἠνώγει δέ μ' ἰόντα.. πυθέσθαι ἠὲ.. ἦ.. φύξιν βουλεύοιτε μετὰ σφίσιν Il.10.398
(reported from φύξιν βουλεύουσι μετὰ σφίσιν ib. 311); σφέας for ὑμᾶς in Hdt.3.71 (but with v.l. σφεα).

IV later as 1 pers. pl. (cf. σφέτερος, σφωΐτερος, ἑός) , ἧμιν ἐνὶ σφίσι A.R.2.1278
; σφᾶς = ἡμᾶς, Men.Prot.p.119 D.; censured by Luc.Sol.8,9.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σφεῖς
23 ἐκεῖνος

ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο, also [full] κεῖνος (regular in [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Ion. (as SIG37.3 (Teos, v B.C.), though Hdt. prefers ἐκεῖνος), and Lyr., in Trag. κεῖνος only where the metre requires, cf. A.Pers. 230, 792, S.Aj. 220 (anap.), etc. ; but not in [dialect] Att. Prose, and in Com. only in mock Trag. passages): [dialect] Aeol. [full] κῆνος Sapph.2.1: [dialect] Dor. [full] τῆνος Theoc.1.4, etc.: in Com., strengthd. [full] ἐκεινοσί Eup.277 (prob.), Ar.Eq. 1196, etc. ; [full] ἐκεινοσίν A.D.Pron.59.24: ([etym.] ἐκεῖ):—demonstr. Pron.

A the person there, that person or thing, Hom., etc.: generally with reference to what has gone immediately before, Pl.Phd. 106c, X.Cyr.1.6.9, etc. ; but when οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος refer to two things before mentioned, ἐκεῖνος, prop. belongs to the more remote, in time, place, or thought, οὗτος to the nearer, Pl.Euthd. 271b, etc.: but ἐκεῖνος sts. = the latter, X.Mem. 1.3.13, D.8.72, Arist.Pol. 1325a7, etc.: ἐκεῖνος is freq. the predicate to οὗτος or ὅδε, οὗτος ἐκεῖνος τὸν σὺ ζητέεις Hdt.1.32
; τοῦτ' ἔστ' ἐκεῖνο E.Hel. 622
; ἆρ' οὗτός ἐστ' ἐκεῖνος ὅν..; Ar. Pax 240, etc.: also joined as if one Pron., τοῦτ' ἐκεῖνο..δέρκομαι S.El. 1115
, etc. ; κατ' ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ at that point of time, Plu.Alex.32, etc. ; ἐς ἐ. τοῦ χρόνου D.C. 46.49
; ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο, à propos, Luc.Nigr.8.

2 to denote wellknown persons, etc., κεῖνος μέγας θεός Il.24.90
; ἐκεῖνος ἡνίκ' ἦν Θουκυδίδης Ar.Ach. 708
; καίτοι φασὶν Ἰφικράτην ποτ' ἐκεῖνον.. D.21.62
; ὦ παῖ 'κείνου τἀνδρός Pl.Phlb. 36d
.

b ἐκεῖνα
the ideal world, Id.Phdr. 250a
.

3 for things, of which one cannot remember or must not mention the name, = ὁ δεῖνα, so-and-so, Ar.Nu. 195.

b in formulae, τεθνάτω καὶ οἱ παῖδες οἱ ἐξ ἐκείνου IG12.10.33
.

4 with simple demonstr. force, Ἶρος ἐκεῖνος ἧσται Irus sits there, Od.18.239 ; νῆες ἐκεῖναι ἐπιπλέουσιν there are ships sailing up, Th.1.51.

5 in orat. obliq. where prop. the reflex. Pron. αὑτοῦ would stand, X. HG 1.6.14, Is.8.22, etc.

6 after a Relat. in apodosi almost pleon., X.Cyr. 1.4.19 (s.v.l.).

7 in [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Att. the Subst. with ἐκεῖνος prop. has the Art. ( κῆνος ὤνηρ Alc. Supp. 25.6
), and ἐκεῖνος may precede or follow the Subst., ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ Th. 1.20
, Pl. Phd. 57a ; τὴν στρατείαν ἐ., τὸν ἄνδρ' ἐ., Th. 1.10, Ar. Pax 649 : in Poets the Art. is freq. omitted, ἤματι κείνψ Il. 2.37
, etc. ; but when this is the case in Prose, ἐκεῖνος follows the Subst., ἡμέρας ἐκείνης Th. 3.59
, etc.

II Adv.
ἐκείνως
in that case, Id.1.77
, 3.46 ; in that way, Hp.Fract. 27 ; ζῆν Pl. R. 516d
, etc.: [dialect] Ion. [full] κείνως Hdt. 1.120.

III dat. fem. ἐκείνῃ as Adv.,

1 of Place, at that place, in that neighbourhood, Hdt. 8.106, Th. 4.77, etc. ; κείνῃ (sc. ὁδῷ) Od. 13.111.

2 of Manner, in that manner, Pl. R. 556a, etc.

IV with Preps., ἐξ ἐκείνου from that time, X. Ages.1.17 ; ἀπ' ἐκείνου Luc. DMar. 2.2
; κατ' ἐκεῖνα in that region, X. HG 3.5.17, etc. ;
μετ' ἐκεῖνα
afterwards, Th. 5.81
; cf. ἐπέκεινα.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐκεῖνος
24 ἐπεί

ἐπεί, Conj., both temporal and causal; also [full] ἐπειδή, [full] ἐπείτε.

A OF TIME ( ἐπειδή is more freq. in this sense in Prose), after that, since, when, from Hom. downwds.:

I with Ind.,

1 of a definite occurrence in past time, mostly c. [tense] aor., ἐπεί π' εὔξαντο after they had prayed, Il.1.458;
ἐπειδὴ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη Ἀρταξέρξης
after D.
had died and A. had succeeded, X.An.1.1.3: rarely c. [tense] impf., ἐπειδὴ εἱστιώμεθ' Ar.Nu. 1354
; ἐ. πόντον εἰσεβάλλομεν E.IT 260
; ἐ. ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος X.An.1.1.1
: c. [tense] plpf., ἐπειδὴ ἐξηπάτησθε.. after you had been deceived.., D.18.42; but generally the [tense] aor. is found, the [tense] plpf. being used only for special emphasis: c. [tense] impf. to express an action not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, X.An.6.5.27.

2 with implied reference to some later time, ἐ. or ἐπειδή, = ἐξ οὗ, from the time when, since, mostly c. [tense] aor., πολλὰ πλάγχθη, ἐ. ἔπερσε Od.1.2
; ἐπείτε παρέλαβον τὸν θρόνον, τοῦτο ἐφρόντιζον ever since I came to the throne, I had this in mind, Hdt.7.8.
ά; ἐπειδήπερ ὑπέστη Th.8.68
; δέκατον μὲν ἔτος τόδ' ἐ... ἦραν A.Ag. 40
: sts. c. [tense] pres. (used in [tense] pf. sense) and [tense] pf., ἐ. δὲ φροῦδός ἐστι στρατός since the army is gone, S.Ant.15; ἐπείτε ὑπὸ τῷ Πέρσῃ εἰσί, πεπόνθασι τοιόνδε ever since they have been, now that they are.., Hdt.3.117.

II with Subj., ἄν being always added in [dialect] Att. Prose, and ἄν or κε generally in Poetry: ἐπεί with ἄν becomes ἐπήν (so in Com., Ar.Lys. 1175,Av. 983), later ἐπάν (q.v.), [dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν Schwyzer 800
(vi B.C.), Hdt.3.153, al., ἐπήν Hp.Fract.6
, al., and ἐπειδή with ἄν ἐπειδάν (q.v.); Hom. has ἐπεί κε, ἐπήν (once ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
):

1 referring to future time with [tense] fut. apodosis, τέκνα ἄξομεν.. ἐπὴν πτολίεθρον ἕλωμεν when we shall have taken the city, Il.4.238; ἐ. κ' ἀπὸ λαὸς ὄληται 11.764
. cf. Od.17.23; ἐπεάν περ ἡμίονοι τέκωσι, τότε τὸ τεῖχος ἁλώσεσθαι Hdt.3.153
; ταῦτ', ἐπειδὰν περὶ τοῦ γένους εἴπω, τότ' ἐρῶ I will speak of this, when I have spoken.., D.57.16, cf. X.An.2.3.29; ἐ. ἂν σύ γε πότ μον ἐπίσπῃς Il.6.412
; χρὴ δέ, ὅταν μὲν τιθῆσθε τοὺς νόμους,.. σκοπεῖν, ἐπειδὰν δὲ θῆσθε, φυλάττειν whenever you are enacting your laws,.. and after you have enacted them.., D.21.34.

2 of repeated action, with a [tense] pres. apodosis, whenever, when once, δαμνᾷ, ἐ. κε λίπῃ ὀστέα θυμός Od.11.221
, cf. Il.9.409; ἐπειδὰν ἡ ἐκφορὰ ᾖ.. ἄγουσι whenever the burial takes place they bring, Th.2.34; ἐπειδὰν κρύψωσι γῇ.. λέγει when they have covered them with earth, ibid.: sts. without ἄν or κε in Poets, ἐ. ἂρ βλέφαρ' ἀμφικαλύψῃ Od.20.86
; ἐ. δὴ τόν γε δαμάσσεται.. ὀϊστός Il.11.478
, cf. S.OC 1225 (lyr.), Ant. 1025.

3 like A.1.2, δέκα ἡμερῶν ἐπειδὰν δόξῃ within ten days from the passing of the resolution, IG12.88.7.

III with Opt. (without ἄν):

1 referring to future time, ἐπειδὴ πρὸς τὸ φῶς ἔλθοι, ὁρᾶν οὐδ' ἂν ἓν δύνασθαι (sc. οὐκ οἴει); after he had come into the light.., Pl.R. 516a: Hom. sts. uses ἐπήν with opt. in same sense as ἐπεί, Il.24.227, Od.2.105 (codd.), etc.

2 more freq. of repeated action, with a past apodosis, ἐ. ζεύξειεν.., δησάσκετο Il.24.14
; ἐπειδὴ δέ τι ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο X.An.4.5.9
; ἐ. πύθοιτο, ἐπῄνει Id.Cyr.5.3.55
, cf. Th.8.38, Pl.Phd. 59d, Prt. 315b.

3 in orat. obliq. after past tenses, representing a subj. in orat. rect., αὐτὸς δὲ ἐπεὶ διαβαίης, ἀπιέναι ἔφησθα (the direct form being ἐπὴν διαβῶ) X.An. 7.2.27, cf. 3.5.18, Cyr.1.4.21; after opt. in a final clause, ἐπορεύοντο, ὅπως ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ.. ἴοιεν Th.7.80
.

4 by assimilation to opt. in principal clause, ἦ τ' ἂν.. νῦν μὲν ἀνώγοιμι πτολεμίζειν.. ἐπὴν τεισαίμεθα λώβην Il.19.208
; ὃς τὸ καταβρόξειεν ἐπεὶ κρητῆρι μιγείη Od.4.222
.

5 ἐπειδάν c. opt. is f.l. in some passages of early authors, as X.Cyr.1.3.11, D.30.6 (c. ind., Plb.13.7.8): found in later Gr., Agath.2.5, al., Zos.5.18.10.

IV with Inf., only in orat. obliq., ἐπειδὴ δὲ κατὰ σχολὴν σκέψασθαι, κόπτεσθαι (sc. ἔφη) Pl.R. 619c, cf.Smp. 174d, Hdt.4.10, 7.150.

V with other words:

1 ἐ. τάχιστα as soon as, freq. separated by a word, ἐ. ἦλθε τάχιστα,.. ἀπέδοτο X.An.7.2.6
; ἐ. δὲ τάχιστα διέβη Id.Cyr.3.3.22
; ἐ. θᾶττον Arist.Pol. 1284a40
; ἐ. εὐθέως X.HG3.2.4
; ἐ... αὐτίκα Pi.N.1.35
; ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα Pl.Prt. 310c
, D.27.16; ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα Hdt.8.144
, X.An.3.1.9; rarely ἐπειδὴ θᾶττον D.37.41
; ἐπειδὰν θᾶττον Pl.Prt. 325c
.

b ἐ. τὰ πρῶτα Il.12.420
; ἐ. τὸ πρῶτον A.Ag. 1287
.

2 with emphatic Particles, ἐπεὶ ἄρα when then, in continuing a narrative, Il.6.426; ἐπεὶ οὖν when then, in resuming a narrative, 1.57, 3.4; ἐπεὶ ὦν Hdt.3.9
; ἐπεὶ γὰρ δή Id.9.90
, etc.

B CAUSAL ( ἐπεί more freq. in this sense in early Prose: ἐπειδή whereas is used in preambles of decrees, IG22.103, etc.;
ἐπειδήπερ
inasmuch as, Ev. Luc.
1.1
), since, seeing that, freq. from Hom. downwards:

1 with Ind. (after both present and past tenses), ἐ. οὐδὲ ἔοικε Il.1.119
, cf. 153, 278, Pi.O.4.16, X.Mem.2.3.4; ἐπειδή Th.8.80
; ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις Pl.Prt. 335c
; νίκη δ' ἐπείπερ ἕσπετ', ἐμπέδως μένοι A.Ag. 854
; freq. with past tenses with ἄν, ἐπεὶ οὔποτ' ἂν στόλον ἐπλεύσατ' ἄν S.Ph. 1037
; ἐπεὶ οὔ κεν ἀνιδρωτί γ' ἐτελέσθη Il.15.228
, cf. D. 18.49; οὐ γὰρ ἂν σθένοντά γε εἷλέν μ'· ἐπεὶ οὐδ' ἂν ὧδ' ἔχοντ' (sc. εἷλεν) S.Ph. 948: esp. in the sense, for otherwise.., Pi.O.9.29, S.OT 433, X.Mem.2.7.14, Herod.2.72, etc.: so c. [tense] fut., ἐξέστω δὲ μηδενὶ.. τεθῆναι.., ἐ. ἀποδώσει.. otherwise he shall pay.., Rev.Et.Anc.4.261 (near Smyrna): c. imper., ἐ. δίδαξον for teach me, S.El. 352, OC 969, cf. OT 390, Ar.V.73, Pl.Grg. 473e: with an interrog., ἐ. πῶς ἂν καλέσειας; for how would you call him? Ar.Nu. 688, cf. Pi.P.7.5, A.Ch. 214, S. Tr. 139 (lyr.); ὦ Ἀλκιβιάδη, ἐπειδὴ περὶ τίνος Ἀθηναῖοι διανοοῦνται βουλεύεσθαι, ἀνίστασαι συμβουλεύσων; Pl.Alc.1.106c
.

2 c. Opt., ἐ. ἂν μάλα τοι σχεδὸν ἔλθοι Il.9.304
, cf. S.Aj. 916; so after past tenses on the principle of orat. obliq., ἐπείπερ ἡγήσαιντο since (as they said) they believed, X.Mem.1.4.19.

3 c. Inf. in orat. obliq., ἐ. γιγνώσκειν γε αὐτά Pl.Prt. 353a
, cf. Hdt.8.111, Th.2.93.

4 in elliptical expressions, ἀδύνατός [εἰμι], ἐ. ἐβουλόμην ἂν οἷός τ' εἶναι I am unable (and yet I am sorry), for I should like to have the power, Pl.Prt. 335c; so εἶμι· ἐ. καὶ ταῦτ' ἂν ἴσως οὐκ ἀηδῶς σου ἤκουον ibid. (here the sense may be given by and yet, although, cf. ib. 333c, 317a, Ap. 19e, Smp. 187a, Arist.EN 1121a19); ἐ. ὅ γε ἀποθανὼν πελάτης τις ἦν ἐμός and yet (moreover) the murdered man was my own hired man, Pl. Euthphr.4c.

b sts. after a voc., where 'listen' may be supplied, Ἕκτορ, ἐ. με κατ' αἶσαν ἐνείκεσας Il.3.59
, cf. 13.68, Od.3.103, 211.

5 with other Particles, ἐ. ἄρα, ἐ. ἂρ δή since then, Od.17.185; ἐ. γε (ἐπεί.. γε Il.1.352
, Hes. Th. 171), more emphatic than ἐ., since indeed, E.Cyc. 181, Hipp. 955; ἐπειδή γε ib. 946, Pl.Phd. 77d, D.54.29; sts. separated, ἐπειδή.. γε S.El. 631
, Pl.Phd. 87c; ἐ. γε δή Hdt.3.9
, S.Ant. 923, ἐπειδή γε καί Th.6.18
; ἐ. ἦ since in truth, ἐ. ἦ πολὺ φέρτερόν ἐστι Il.1.169
, cf. 156, Od.9.276; ἐπείπερ (ἐ... περ Il.13.447
, Od.20.181) in Trag. and Prose, A.Ag. 822, S.OC75, Pl.Phd. 114d; ἐπειδήπερ in Com. and Prose, Ar.Ach. 437, 495, Nu. 1412, Th.6.18, Pl.R. 350e; ἐ. τοι since surely, S.OC 433; ἐ. νύ τοι Il.1.416
; ἐ. τοι καί E. Med. 677
, Pl.R. 567e. [ἐ. sts. begins a verse in Hom., Il.22.379, Od. 4.13, 8.452, 21.25; sts. coalesces by synizesis with οὐ, οὐδέ, etc., S. Ph. 446, 948, etc.]

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπεί
25 ἐπί

ἐπί, Thess. (before τ)

A ἐτ IG9(2).517.14
(iii B. C.), Prep. with gen., dat., and acc., to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

A WITH GEN.:

I of Place,

1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, καθέζετ' ἐ. θρόνου Il.1.536
; ἧστο.. ὑψοῦ ἐπ' ἀκροτάτης κορυφῆς 13.12
; ἐ. πύργου ἔστη 16.700
; κεῖται ἐ. χθονός 20.345
: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ' ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (sc. σταθέντα) ἐλήλατο 10.153
; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ' ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, 1.46; ἐ. γῆς, opp. ὑπὸ γῆς, Pl.Lg. 728a: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ' ἵππων on our chariot, Il.24.356; οὐκ ἂν ἐφ' ὑμετ έρων ὀχέων.. ἵκεσθον 8.455
; ἄγαγε.. δῶρ' ἐπ' ἀπήνης 24.447
; ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης.. ὠχέετο Hdt.1.31
; ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων ὀχεῖσθαι X.Cyr.4.5.58
; οὓς κῆρες φορέουσι.. ἐ. νηῶν Il.8.528
; πέμπειν τινὰς ἐ. τριήροιν X.HG5.4.56
, etc.; ἐπ' ὤμου.. φέρειν Od.10.170
; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ' ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, Numen. ap. Eus.PE14.7; βαδιοῦνται ἐ. δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ' ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, Pl.Smp. 190d; ἐπ' ἄκρων ὁδοιπορεῖν walk on tiptoe, S.Aj. 1230; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, νέρθε κἀπὶ γῆς ἄνω Id.OT 416
; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, X.An.1.8.9,3.2.36; but most freq., in, rarely in Hom., ἐπ' ἀγροῦ in the country. Od. 1.190; γᾶς ἐ. ξένας S.OC 1705
(lyr.); νήσου τῆσδ' ἐφ' ἧς ναίει Id.Ph. 613
; ἐ. ξένας δμωῒς ἐπ' ἀλλοτρίας πόλεος E.Andr. 137
(lyr.); οἱ ἐ. Θρᾴκης σύμμαχοι Th.5.35
; τοὺς ἐ. τῆς Ἀσίας κατοικοῦντας Isoc.12.103
; ἐπ' οἰκήματος κατίσαι, καθῆσθαι, in a brothel, Hdt.2.121.έ, Pl. Chrm. 163b; τοὺς ἐ. τῶν οἰκημάτων καθεζομένους Aeschin.1.74
; ἐ. τῶν ἐργαστηρίων καθίζειν Isoc.7.15
; μένειν ἐ. τῆς αὐτῶν (sc. χώρας ) remain in statu quo, Indut. ap. Th.4.118; οἱ ἐπ' ἐρημίας λῃστεύοντες Jul. Or.7.210a
; later of towns, ἐπ' Ἀλεξανδρείας BGU908.16
(ii A.D.), etc.; sts. also, at or near, ἐπ' αὐτάων (sc. τῶν πηγῶν) Il.22.153; κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Ποσιδηΐου Hdt.7.115
; αἱ ἐ. Λήμνου ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι off Lemnos, ib.6 codd.; τὰ ἐ. Θρᾴκης the Thrace- ward region, Th.1.59, cf. IG12.45.17, etc.; ποταμοὶ ἐφ' ὧν ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι.. on, i.e. near which.., X.An.2.5.18; ἐ. τῶν τραπεζῶν at the money-changers' tables, Pl.Ap. 17c; in Geom., αἱ ἐφ' ὧν AA BB [ γραμμαί] the lines AA BB, Arist.EN 1132b6, etc.; ἕλιξ ἐφ' ἇς τὰ ΑΒΓΔ a spiral ABCD, Archim.Spir.13 (cf. B.1.1k); also ἐ. τοῦ βάτου in the passage concerning the bush, Ev.Marc.12.26.

2 in various relations not strictly local, μένειν ἐ. τῆς ἀρχῆς remain in the command, X.Ages.1.37; μένειν ἐ. τινος abide by it, D.4.9; ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων, ἐ. τοῦ πολεμεῖν εἶναι, to be engaged in.., Id.15.11, Prooem.1; ἐ. ὀνόματος εἶναι bear a name, Id.39.21; ἔχεται πόλις ἐ. νόσου S.Ant. 1141
(lyr.).

b of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ' ἀγκύρας ride at (i.e. in dependence upon an) anchor, Hdt.7.188; ἐ. προσπόλου μιᾶς χωρεῖν dependent upon an attendant, S.OC 746.

c with the personal and reflexive Pron., once in Hom., εὔχεσθε.. σιγῇ ἐφ' ὑμείων Il.7.195
; later mostly with [ per.] 3rd pers., ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν κεῖσθαι by themselves, Hdt.2.2, cf. 8.32; οἰκέειν κώμην Id.5.98
; ἐ. σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτόνομοι οἰκεῖν Th.2.63
; ἵζεσθαι Hdt.9.17
; ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν πλεῖν Th.8.8
; ἐπ' ὑμέων αὐτῶν βαλέσθαι consider it by yourselves, Hdt.3.71, etc.; αὐτὴ ἐφ' αὑτῆς σκοποῦσα Th.6.40
; ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸν ἐξετασμὸν ποιεῖσθαι D.18.16
; ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν διαλέγονται speak in a dialect of their own, Hdt. 1.142; also αὐτοὶ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν χωρεῖν X. An.2.4.10
; πράττειν Pl.Prt. 326d
, cf. Sph. 217c; τὸ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν μόνον προορώμενοι considering their own interest only, th.1.17.

d with numerals, to denote the depth of a body of soldiers, ἐ. τεττάρων ταχφῆναι to be drawn up four deep, four in file, X.An.1.2.15, etc.; ἐ. πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι, of the Thebansat Leuctra, Id.HG 6.4.12; ἐπ' ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι, i.e. in a long thin line, Id.An.4.8.11; οὐκ ἐπ' ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην Th.7.79
; ἐφ' ἑνὸς ἄγειν in single file, X.Cyr.2.4.2, cf. An.5.2.6; rarely of the length of the line, ἐ. τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς Th.2.90
; in X., ἐγένοντο τὸ μέτωπον ἐ. τριακοσίων.. τὸ δὲ βάθος ἐφ' ἑκατόν Cyr.2.4.2
; πλεῖν ἐ. κέρως, ἐ. κέρας, v. infr. c.1.3; ἐ. φάλαγγος γίγνεται τὸ στράτευμα is formed in column, An.4.6.6, etc. (but in E.Ph. 1467, ἀσπίδων ἔπι is merely in or under arms): hence, generally, ἐ. ὀκτὼ πλίνθων τὸ εὖρος eight bricks wide, X.An.7.8.14.

e c. gen. pers., before, in presence of, ἐ. μαρτύρων.. πράσσεταί τι Antipho 2.3.8
; ἐξελέγχεσθαι ἐ. πάντων D.25.36
; so, before a magistrate or official, ἐ. τοῦ στρατηγοῦ POxy. 38.11
(i A.D.), cf. UPZ71.15 (ii B.C.), Ev.Matt.28.14; γράψομαί σε ἐ. Ῥαδαμάνθυος Luc.Cat.18
; τινὰ εἰς δίκην καὶ κρίσιν ἐ. τῶν στρατοπέδων προκαλεῖν Jul.Or.1.30d
; πίστεις δοῦναι ἐ. θεῶν D.H.5.29
; but ἐπὶ δικασταῖς is f.l. in D.19.243 (leg. ἔπη).

f with Verbs of perceiving, observing, judging, etc., in the case of, ἐπὶ νούσων παντοίων ἐπύθοντο Emp.112.10
; ὁρᾶν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.3.9.3
; αἰσθάνεσθαί τι ἐ. τινος Pl.R. 406c
, etc.; τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν ἐ. τινος Hyp.Eux.32
; τὰ συμβόλαια ἐ. τῶν νόμων σκοπεῖν D.18.210
; ἐπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων ἂν ἐσκόπει ib.233, cf. 25.2 (v.l.); ἐφ' ἑνός τι παριδεῖν Lycurg.64
; τὰς ἐναντιώσεις ἐ. μὲν τῶν λόγων τηροῦντες, ἐ. δὲ τῶν ἔργων μὴ καθορῶντες Isoc.13.7
; οὐδεὶς ἐφ' αὑτοῦ τὰ κακὰ συνορᾷ Men.631
; ἀγνοεῖν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.2.3.2
; also with Verbs of speaking, on a subject, λέγειν ἐ. τινος Pl.Chrm. 155d
, R. 524e, etc.; ἐπιδεῖξαί τι ἐ. τινος Isoc.8.109
; ἵνα τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπ' αὐτῶν κοινοὺς ποιήσωμαι D.60.12
.

3 implying Motion:

a where the sense of motion is lost in the sense of being supported, ὀρθωθεὶς.. ἐπ' ἀγκῶνος having raised himself upon his elbow, Il.10.80; ἐ. μελίης.. ἐρεισθείς 22.225
; τὴν μὲν.. καθεῖσεν ἐ. θρόνου 18.389
.

b in a pregnant sense, denoting the goal of motion (cf. εἰς A.1.2
, ἐν A.1.8
), νῆα.. ἐπ' ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, 1.485; περάαν νήσων ἔπι carry to the islands and leave there, 21.454, cf.22.45; ἐ. τῆς γῆς καταπίπτειν X.Cyr.4.5.54
; ἀναβῆναι ἐ. τῶν πύργων ib.7.1.39; ἐπ' Ἀβύδου ἀφικομέναις Th.8.79
(v.l.); freq. of motion towards or (in a military sense) upon a place, προτρέποντο μελαινάων ἐ. νηῶν Il.5.700
; τρέσσε.. ἐφ' ὁμίλου 11.546
(but νήσου ἔ. Ψυρίης νέεσθαι to go near Psyria, Od.3.171); ἐπ' οἴκου ἀπελαύνειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρεῖν, homewards, Hdt.2.121.δ, Th.1.30,87, etc.; also with names of places, ἰέναι ἐ. Κυζίκου Hdt.4.14
; πλεῖν ἐ. Χίου Id.1.164
, cf. 168; ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ' αἰγύπτου ib. 1; ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἐ. Θεσσαλίης Id.5.64
; ὁ κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Παγασέων φέρων the bay that leads to Pagasae, Id.7.193; ἡ ἐ. βαβυλῶνος ὁδός the road leading to B., X.Cyr. 5.3.45, cf.An.6.3.24.

c metaph., ἐ. γνώμης τινὸς γίγνεσθαι come to an opinion, D.4.7; ἐπ' ἐλπίδος γενέσθαι Plu.Sol.14
; ὡς ἐ. κινδύνου as if to meet danger, Th.6.34;
ἐ. τοῦ ἀλύπως ζῆν
with a view to.., Pl.Prt. 358b
; cf. infr. B. 111.2.

II of Time, in the time of, ἐ. προτέρων ἀνθρώπων Il.5.637
,23.332; ἐ. Κρόνου Hes.Op. 111
; ἐ. Κέκροπος, ἐ. Δαρείου, etc., Hdt.8.44,6.98, etc.; ἐ. τῶν τριάκοντα Lys.13.2
; ὀλιγαρχία ἡ ἐ. τῶν τετρακοσίων καταστᾶσα Isoc.8.108
; ἐ. τούτου τυραννεύοντος, ἐ. Λέοντος βασιλεύοντος, ἐ. Μήδων ἀρχόντων, etc., Hdt.1.15,65, 134, etc.; ἐ. τῆς ἐμῆς βασιλείας Isoc.3.32
; ἐπ' ἐμεῦ in my time, Hdt.1.5, 2.46, etc.; ἡ εἰρήνη ἡ ἐπ' Ἀνταλκίδου D.20.54
, cf. X.HG5.1.36; αἱ ἐπ' Ἀσδρούβα γενόμεναι ὁμολογίαι Plb.3.15.5
; ἐπ' εἰρήνης in time of peace, Il.2.797, 9.403; ἐπ' ἐμῆς νεότητος Ar.Ach. 211
(lyr.); ἐ. Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Th.6.6
; ἐπ' ἡμέρης ἑκάστης v.l. for -ῃ -τῃ in Hdt.5.117.

b later ἐ. δείπνου at dinner, Luc.Asin.3; ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης, ἐφ' ἑκάστης κύλικος, Plu.Alex.23; ἐ. τῆς κύλικος, ἐ. τοῦ ποτηρίου, Luc.Pisc.34, Plu.Alex.53.

III in various causal senses:

1 over, of persons in authority, ἐπ' οὗ ἐτάχθημεν Hdt.5.109
; οἱ ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων the public officers, D.18.247; freq. in forged decrees, ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὅπλων στρατηγός ib.38; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, τῶν ἱππέων, ib.116; ὁ ἐ. τῆς διοικήσεως ib.38 (but cf. c. 111.3); τοῦ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν is f.l. in Lys. 32.5; ὁ ἐ. τῆς χώρας στρατηγός Plu.Phoc.32
; οἱ ἐ. τῶν σιτοποιῶν καὶ μαγείρων Id.Alex.23
; ὁ ἐ. τοῦ οἴνου Id.Pyrrh.5
; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τοῦ Ὄθωνος, = Lat. ab epistulis, his secretary, Id.Oth.9; cf. B. 111.6.

2 κεκλῆσθαι ἐ. τινος to be called after him, Hdt.4.45; ἐ. τινος μετονομασθῆναι Id.1.94
: ἐ. τινος τὰς ἐπωνυμίας ἔχειν Id.4.107
; ἐ. τινος ἐπώνυμος γίγνεσθαι ib. 184; also ἐπ' ὀνόματος καλεῖν Plb.5.35.2
.

3 of occasions, circumstances, and conditions, οὐκ ἐ. τούτου μόνον, ἀλλ' ἐ. πάντων, on all occasions, D.21.38, cf. 183; ἐφ' ἑκάστων Pl.Phlb. 25e
; ἐφ' ἑκατέρου Id.Tht. 159c
; ἐφ' ἑκάστης μαντείας D.21.54
; ἐπ' ἐξουσίας καὶ πλούτου πονηρὸν εἶναι in.. ib.138; ἐ. τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ib.72, cf. 18.17; τὴν ἐ. τῆς πομπῆς καὶ τοῦ μεθύειν πρόφασιν λαβών Id.21.180
; ἐ. σχολῆς Aeschin.3.191
; ἐπ' ἀδείας Plu. Sol.22
; ἐπ' ἀληθείας Ev.Marc.12.14
, POxy.255.16 (i A.D.): hence in adverbial phrases, ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. μοίρας) equally, S.El. 1062 (lyr.); ἐ. καιροῦ D.20.90
; ἐπ' ἐσχάτων at the last, LXXDe.17.7 (v.l. ἐσχάτῳ) ; ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος for the present, SIG543.6 (Epist. Philipp.).

4 in respect of, ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων Arist.Pol. 1280a17
, cf. EN 1131b18; concerning, τὰ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἐνεστηκότα PTeb.7.6
(ii B. C.).

B WITH DAT.:

I of Place, upon, just like the gen. (hence Poets use whichever case suits the metre, whereas in Prose the dat. is more freq.):

1 with Verbs of Rest, ἕζεο τῷδ' ἐ. δίφρῳ Il.6.354
; ἧντ' ἐ. πύργῳ 3.153
; στῆ δ' ἐ... νηΐ 8.222
; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι X.An.1.8.27
; καίειν ἐ. πᾶσι (sc. βωμοῖς) Il.8.240; ἔβραχε χαλκὸς ἐ. στήθεσσι 4.420
; ἐ. χθονὶ δέρκεσθαι 1.88
, etc.: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, νηυσὶν ἐπ' ὠκυπόροισιν ἔβαινον 2.351
(v.l. for ἐν) ; ἐπ' ὤμοις φέρειν E.Ph. 1131
(but ἐφ' ἵππῳ, ἐφ' ἵπποις and the like are never used for ἐφ' ἵππου, etc.); of places, mostly in, ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ Hdt.5.77
; τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμα S.Ph. 353
; ἐπ' ἐσχάτοις τόποις Id.Tr. 1100
; ἐ. τῇ ψυχῇ δάκνομαι Id.Ant. 317
; also, at or near, ἐ. κρήνῃ Od.13.408
; ἐ. θύρῃσι Il.2.788
, etc.; of rivers, etc., by, beside, ἐ. ὠκυρόῳ Κελάδοντι.. 7.133
, etc.; ἐπ' ἐσχάρῃ Od.7.160
; ἐ. νηυσί Il.1.559
, etc.; of persons, οὐ τἀπὶ Λυδοῖς οὐδ' ἐπ' Ὀμφάλῃ λατρεύματα in Lydia, in the power of O., S.Tr. 356.

b on or over, ἐπ' Ἰφιδάμαντι over the body of Iphidamas, Il.11.261, cf. 4.470; τοιόνδ' ἐπ' ἀνδρὶ κομπάζεις λόγον A.Ag. 1400
; also, over or in honour of, ἐ. σοὶ κατέθηκε.. ἄεθλα Od.24.91
; [βοῦς] ἐ. Πατρόκλῳ πέφνεν Il. 23.776
; κειράμενοι χαίτας ἐπ' Ἀδώνιδι Bion 1.81
, cf. Lys.2.80; in [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.sepulchral Inscrr., Schwyzer 348,al.

c in hostile sense, against, Hdt.1.61,6.74, 88, S.Ph. 1139 (lyr.), etc.; as a check upon, οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐ. τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist.Pol. 1299b37
, cf. 1271a39; also, towards, in reference to, ἐ. πᾶσι χόλον τελέσαι Il.4.178
; ἐπ' ἔργοις πᾶσι S.OC 1268
; δικαιότερος καὶ ἐπ' ἄλλῳ ἔσσεαι Il.19.181
, cf. S.Tr. 994 (anap.), etc.; ἐ. τοῖς δυνατοῖς ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην Democr. 191
; τὸ ἐ. πᾶσιν τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος extending over all bodies, Pl. Smp. 210b; ἡ [παιδεία] ἡ ἐ. σώμασι, ἐ. ψυχῇ, Id.R. 376e; τἀπὶ σοὶ κακά the ills which lie upon thee, S.Ph. 806: in [dialect] Att. also, νόμον τίθεσθαι, θεῖναι ἐ. τινι, make a law for his case, whether for or against, Pl.Grg. 488d, Lexap.And.1.87; νόμους ἀναγράψαι ἐ. τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι D.24.5
; νόμος κεῖται ἐ. τινι ib.70; τἀπὶ τῷ πλήθει νενομοθετημένα ib.123, cf. 142; τί θεσμοποιεῖς ἐ. ταλαιπώρῳ νεκρῷ; E.Ph. 1645.

d. of accumulation, upon, after, ὄγχνη ἐπ' ὄγχνῃ one pear after another, pear on pear, Od.7.120; ἐ. κέρδεϊ κέρδος Hes.Op. 644
; ἄτη ἑτέρα ἐπ' ἄτῃ A. Ch. 404
(lyr.); πήματα ἐ. πήμασι, ἐ. νόσῳ νόσος, S.Ant. 595, OC 544 (both lyr.).

e. in addition to, over and above, besides, οὐκ ἄρα σοί γ' ἐ. εἴδεϊ καὶ φρένες ἦσαν Od.17.454
, cf. 308; ἄλλα τε πόλλ' ἐ. τῇσι παρίσχομεν Il.9.639
, cf. Od.22.264; ἐ. τοῖσι besides, 24.277; ἐ. τούτοις Him.Or.14.10
; so of Numerals, τρισχιλίους ἐ. μυρίοις Plu.Publ.20
, cf. Jul.Or.4.148c, etc.; γυναῖκ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν.. ἔχει E.Med. 694
: with Verbs of eating and drinking, with, ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ πίνειν ὕδωρ X.Cyr.6.2.27
; νέκταρ ποτίσαι ἐπ' ἀμβροσίᾳ Pl.Phdr. 247e
; esp. of a relish, κάρδαμον μόνον ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.11
; παίειν ἐφ' ἁλὶ τὰν μᾶδδαν Ar.Ach. 835
: metaph., ἐ. τῷ φάγοις ἥδιστ' ἄν; ἐ. βαλλαντίῳ; Id.Eq. 707; later ἐ. γογγυλίσι διαβιῶναι live on turnips, Ath.10.419a.

f. of position, after, behind, of soldiers, X.Cyr.8.3.16-18.

g. in dependence upon, in the power of, τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ' ἀνδράσι κεῖται Pi.P.8.76
; ἐ. τινί ἐστι it is in his power to do, c.inf., Hdt.8.29, etc.; ἐ. σοί ἐστιν ἀναζωπυρεῖν M.Ant.7.2
; ἐ. ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι Th.6.22
; ἐ. τῷ πλήθει in their hands, S.OC66, cf. Th.2.84; τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ ἐ. ἐκείνῳ, etc., as far as is in my power, etc., X. Cyr.5.4.11, Isoc.4.142, etc.; τὸ ἐ. τούτοις εἶναι Lys.28.14
; ἐ. τοῖς υἱάσι their property, Leg.Gort.4.37.

h. according to, ἐ. τοῖς νόμοις Lexap.D. 24.56; ἐ. πᾶσι δικαίοις ποιούμεθα τοὺς λόγους Id.20.88
; ἐ. προφάσει θηρός S.Tr. 662
codd.(lyr.).

i. of condition or circumstances in which one is, ἀτελευτήτῳ ἐ. ἔργῳ Il.4.175
, etc.; ἐπ' ἀρρήτοις λόγοις S.Ant. 556
; ἐπ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι E. Ion 228
(lyr.); ταύταις ἐ. συντυχίαις Pi.P.1.36
; ἐπ' εὐπραξίᾳ S.OC 1554
; ἐ. τῷ παρόντι Th.2.36
; ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ λαβεῖν, v. αὐτόφωρος; also ἐ. τῷ δείπνῳ at dinner, X.Cyr.1.3.12, Thphr.Char. 3.2; ἐ. τῇ κύλικι Pl.Smp. 214b
; ἐ. θαλίαις E.Med. 192
(anap.).

k. Geom., of the point, etc., at which letters are written, κέντρον ἐφ' ᾧ K Hippocr. ap. Simp.in Ph.64.14; ἡ [γραμμὴ] ἐφ' ᾗ HK the line HK, Arist.Mete. 375b22.

2. with Verbs of Motion:

a. where the sense of motion merges in that of support, ἐ. χθονὶ βαίνει Il.4.443
; θεῖναι ἐ. γούνασιν 6.92
; καταθέσθαι ἐ. γαίῃ 3.114
; ἱστὸν ἔστησεν ἐ. ψαμάθοις 23.853
; ἐ. φρεσὶ θῆκε 1.55
; δυσφόρους ἐπ' ὄμμασι γνώμας βαλεῖν S.Aj.51
, etc.

b. in pregnant construction, πέτονται ἐπ' ἄνθεσιν fly on to the flowers and settle there, Il.2.89; ἐκ.. βαῖνον ἐ. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης Od.15.499
; καθεῖσεν ἐ. Σκαμάνδρῳ Il.5.36
; ἦλθε δ' ἐ. Κρήτεσσι 4.251
, cf. 273; νῆες εἰρύατ'.. ἐ. θινὶ θαλάσσης 4.248
.

c. rarely for εἰς c.acc., νηυσὶν ἔ. γλαφυρῇσιν ἐλαυνέμεν 5.327
, 11.274.

d. in hostile sense, upon or against, ἐ. τινι ἔχειν, ἰθύνειν ἵππους, 5.240, 8.110; ἐ. τινι ἱέναι βέλος, ἰθύνεσθαι ὀϊστόν, 1.382, Od.22.8; ἐ. τοι Ἀκράγαντι τανύσαις Pi.O.2.91
; ἐ. Τυδεΐδῃ ἐτιταίνετο.. τόξα Il.5.97
; ἐφ' Ἕκτορι.. ἀκοντίσσαι 16.358
; κύνας.. σεύῃ ἐπ' ἀγροτέρῳ συΐ 11.293
; ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214
, cf. E.Ph. 1379, etc.: also ἐ. τινι τετάχθαι Th.2.70
, 3.13; ὅστις φάρμακα δηλητήρια ποιοῖ ἐ. Τηΐοισιν SIG37.2
(Teos, v B.C.).

II. of Time, rarely, and never in good [dialect] Att., exc. in sense of succession (infr. 2), ἐ. νυκτί by night, Il.8.529; ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ, αἱ δ' ἐ. νυκτί Hes.Op. 102
; ἐπ' ἤματι τῷδε on this very day, Il.13.234; ἐπ' ἤματι for to-day, 19.229, 10.48, Od.2.284; αἰεὶ ἐπ' ἤματι every day, 14.105; ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ Hdt.4.112
, 5.53, cf. D.S. 34/5.2.1; ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ ἐστίν Heraclit.6
; ἐ. τρίς Act.Ap.10.16
, PHolm.1.18.

2. of succession, after, ἕκτῃ ἐ. δέκα on the 16th of the month, Chron. ap. D.18.155, Decr.ib.181 ( δεκάτῃ codd.); τετράδι ἐ. δέκα IG12.304.62
; πρὸ τῆς ἕκτης ἐ. δέκα ib.22.1361.19; ἐπ' ἐξεργασμένοισι, = Lat. re peracta, Hdt.4.164, etc.; ἐ. τινι ἀγορεύειν, ἀνίστασθαι, E.Or. 898, 902, X.Cyr.2.3.7, etc.; ἐ. διεφθαρμένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt.1.170
, τὰ ἐ. τούτοισι, = Lat. quod superest, Id.9.78, cf. Th.1.65, A.Ag. 255, etc.; τοὐπὶ τῷδε πῆμα E.Hipp. 855
(lyr.), etc.

3. in the time of (cf. A. 11) only in Arc., ἐπὶ Χαιριάδαι Schwyzer665
A 21, cf. 666 (Orchom.).

III. in various causal senses:

1. of the occasion or cause, τετεύξεται ἄλγε' ἐπ' αὐτῇ for her, Il.21.585; ἐ. σοὶ μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον for thee, 9.492: freq. with Verbs expressing some mental affection, ἐπὶ παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit.87
; μέγα φρονεῖν ἐ. τινι to be proud at or of a thing, Pl.Prt. 342d, X.HG3.4.11, etc.; χλιδᾶν ἐ . τινι S.El. 360; ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀγανακτεῖν ἐ. τοῖς παροῦσι, X.An.2.6.26, Isoc.4.122; ὀνομαστὸς ἐ. τινι γεγονέναι X.Mem.1.2.61
; also ἐφ' αἵματι φεύγειν to be tried on a capital charge, D.21.105; πληγὰς λαμβάνειν ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.1.3.16
; ζημιοῦσθαι ἐ. τινι D.24.122
, etc.: in adverbial phrases [δικάσσαι] ἐπ' ἀρωγῇ with favour, Il.23.574; δολίῃ ἐ. τέχνῃ Hes. Th. 540
; ἐ. μιῇ αἰτίῃ ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἔρδειν Hdt.1.137
, etc.; ἐ . κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ for malice, Th.1.37; ἐπ' εὐνοία, ἐπ' ἔχθρα, D. 18.273, 21.55; ἐπ' ἀγαθῇ ἐλπίδι with.., X.Mem.2.1.18, cf. Ep.Rom. 4.18; ἐφ' ἑκατέροις in both cases, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Xenoph.34.4; ἐ. δάκρυσί τινα καταστένειν E. Tr. 315
(lyr.); ἐ. τῇ πάσῃ συκοφαντίᾳ καὶ διασεισμῷ Mitteis Chr. 31 vI (ii B.C.), etc.

2. of an end or purpose, υἱὸν ἐ. κτεάτεσσι λιπέσθαι Il.5.154
, cf. 9.482; ἐ. δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.44; ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύρηται Hdt.1.68
; ἐ. διαφθορῇ Id.4.164
; ἐ. σῷ καιρῷ S.Ph. 151
(lyr.); ἐ. τῷ κέρδει X.Mem.1.2.56
; δῆσαι ἐ. θανάτῳ or τὴν ἐ. θανάτῳ, Hdt.9.37, 3.119, cf.1.109, X.An.1.6.10; ἐ. θανάτῳ συλλαβεῖν Isoc.4.154
; ἐπ' ἐξαγωγῇ for exportation, Hdt.5.6; χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ with a view to gaining.., Id.1.66; ἐ. τούτοις ἐθύσαντο X.An.3.5.18
; ἐ. τῷ ὑβρίζεσθαι Th.1.38
, cf.34, etc.; τι κακοτεχνεῖν ἐ. αἰσχύνῃ τοῦ ἀνδρός PEleph.1.6
(iv B.C.).

3. of the condition upon which a thing is done, ἐ. τούτοισι on these terms, Hdt.1.60, etc.; ἐ. τοῖσδε, ὥστε.. Th.3.114
; ἐ. τούτῳ, ἐπ' ᾧτε on condition that.., Hdt.3.83, cf. 7.158: in orat. obliq., ἐπ' or ἐφ' ᾧτε folld. by inf., Id.1.22, 7.154, X.HG2.2.20; ἐφ' ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν Th.1.126
(but ἐφ' ᾧ = wherefore, Ep.Rom.5.12); ἐπ' οὐδενί on no condition, on no account, Hdt.3.38; but, for no adequate reason, D. 21.132; ἐπ' ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ, ἐπὶ τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal terms, Hdt.9.7, Th.1.27; ἐ. ῥητοῖς, v. ῥητός; also of a woman's dowry, τὴν μητέρα ἐγγυᾶν ἐ. ταῖς ὀγδοήκοντα μναῖς D.28.16
; γῆμαί τινα ἐ. δέκα ταλάντοις And.4.13
; τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα ἐ. τῇ τυραννίδι Hdt.1.60
; on the principle of.., ἐ. τῷ μὴ λυπεῖν ἀλλήλους Th.1.71
.

4. of the price for which.., ἔργον τελέσαι δώρῳ ἔ. μεγάλῳ Il.10.304
, cf. 21.445; ἐ. τίνι χρήματι; Hdt.3.38; ἐ. πόσῳ; Pl.Ap. 41a; ἐ .
ταλάντῳ χρυσίου Ar.Av. 154
; ἐπ' ἀργυρίῳ λέγειν, πράττειν, D.19.182, 24.200; ἐ. χρήμασι λυμαίνεσθαι Id.19.332
; ἐ. πολλῷ ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες Id.1.15
; also of money lent at interest, δανείζεσθαι ἐ. τοῖς μεγάλοις τόκοις ibid.; ἐ. δραχμῇ δανείζειν lend at 12 per cent., Id.27.9; ἐπ' ὀκτὼ ὀβολοῖς τὴν μνᾶν τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου δανείζειν, i.e. at 16 per cent., Id.53.13;
ἐ. διακοσίαις εἴκοσι πέντε τὰς χιλίας
for
225
per mille, i.e. 22.5 per cent., Syngr. ap. eund.35.10; also of the security on which money is borrowed, δανείζειν ἐ. ἀνδραπόδοις Id.27.27
; ἐπ' οἴνου κεραμίοις τρισχιλίοις Id.35.18
; ἐ. νηΐ Id.56.3
; δανείζειν ἐ. τοῖς σώμασιν Arist.Ath.9.1
, cf. 2.2, D.H.4.9.

5. of names, φάος καὶ νὺξ ὀνόμασται.. ἐ. τοῖσί τε καὶ τοῖς Parm.9.2
; ἐ. τῇ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔχθρᾳ στάσις κέκληται Pl.R. 470b
; so ὄνομα κεῖται ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.2.2.12
; ὄνομα καλεῖν ἐ. τινι Pl.Sph. 218c
, cf. 244b; πότερον ταῦτα, πέντε ὀνόματα ὄντα, ἐ. ἑνὶ πράγματί ἐστι Id.Prt. 349b
(v. supr. A. 111.2).

6. of persons in authority, ὅς μ' ἐ. βουσὶν εἷσεν who set me over the kine, Od.20.209, cf. 221; ποιμαίνειν ἐπ' ὄεσσι Il.6.25
; οὖρον κατέλειπον ἐ. κτεάτεσσιν Od.15.89
; σημαίνειν ἐ. δμῳῇσι 22.427
; πέμπειν ἐ. τοσούτῳ στρατεύματι Th.6.29
; ἐ. ταῖς ναυσίν X.HG1.5.11
; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς μηχαναῖς Id.Cyr.6.3.28
; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς καμήλοις ib.33; οἱ ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασιν ὄντες D. 9.2
; ἐ. θυγατρὶ.. γαμεῖν ἄλλην γυναῖκα Hdt.4.154
.

7. in possession of, possessing, ἐ. τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μένειν Th.4.105
, cf. 8.86; ζῆν ἐ. παιδίοις, τελευτᾶν ἐ. παιδὶ γνησίῳ, Alciphr.1.3, Philostr.VS2.12.2; ἐ. παισὶ διαδόχοις Hdn.4.2.1
; ἀποθανεῖν ἐ. κληρονόμοις ταῖς θυγατράσι Artem.1.78
, cf. PMeyer6.22 (ii A.D.); ἐ. μόνῳ παιδὶ σαλεύειν Hld. 1.9
.

C. WITH Acc.:

I. of Place, upon or on to a height, with Verbs of Motion, ἐ. πύργον ἔβη Il.6.386
, cf. 12.375; ἐ. τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν ὀρέων ἀναβαίνειν Hdt.1.131
; προελθεῖν ἐ. βῆμα Th.2.34
; ἀναβιβαστέον τινά, ἀναβαίνειν ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, Pl.R. 467e, X.An.3.4.35; also ἐξ ἵππων ἀποβάντες ἐ. χθόνα Il.3.265
; ἐξεκυλίσθη πρηνὴς ἐ. στόμα upon his face, 6.43; ἐ. θρόνον.. ἕζετο 8.442
; ὤμω.. ἐ. στῆθος συνοχωκότε drawn together upon his breast, 2.218; Ὀδυσσῆ' εἷσαν ἐ. σκέπας Od.6.212
; θέσθαι ἐ. τὰ γόνατα X.An.7.3.23
; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν Aeschin.Socr.54
; ἐ. κεφαλήν head- foremost, Pl.R. 553b, Luc.Pisc.48 (v. κεφαλή): less freq. than ἐπί with gen. or dat.

b. Geom., αἱ ἐ. τὰς ἁφὰς ἐπιζευγνύμεναι εὐθεῖαι joining the points of contact, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.8; κάθετος ἐ. perpendicular to (v. κάθετος).

2. to, ἦλθε θοὰς ἐ. νῆας Il.1.12
, etc.; ἐ. βωμὸν ἄγων ib. 440; ἴθυσαν δ' ἐ. τεῖχος 12.443
; ἐ. τέρμ' ἀφίκετο S.Aj.48
; ἡ [ὁδὸς] ἐ. Σοῦσα φέρει X. An.3.5.15
; ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν Πυλῶν ἐ. τὸ Ποσειδώνιον Th.4.118
; ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79
: c.acc. pers., βῆ δ' ἄρ' ἐπ' Ἀτρεΐδην Il.2.18
, cf. 10.18,85, 150, etc.: sts. in pregn. constr. with Verbs of Rest, ἐπιστῆναι ἐ. τὰς θύρας Pl.Smp. 212d
; παρεῖναι ἐ. τὸν τάφον Th.2.34
, cf. X.Cyr.3.3.12.

b. metaph., ἐ. ἔργα τρέπεσθαι, ἰέναι, Il.3.422, Od.2.127; ἰέναι ἐ. τὸν ἔπαινον Th.2.36
; ἐ. συμφορὴν ἐμπεσεῖν Hdt.7.88
codd.; also ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν ἀποδιδόναι, ὀφείλειν, pay, owe to the bank, D.33.12, Docum. ap. eund.45.31; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν D.33.10
; τὸ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν χρέως ib.24; also εἰσποιηθῆναι ἐ. τὸ ὄνομά τινος to be entered under his name, Id.44.36.

c. up to, as far as ( μέχρι ἐ. X.An.5.1.[1]), παρατείνειν ἐπ' Ἡρακλέας στήλας Hdt.4.181
; ἐ. θάλασσαν καθήκειν Th.2.27
,97: metaph., ἐ. πείρατ' ἀέθλων ἤλθομεν Od.23.248
; ἐ. διηκόσια ἀποδιδόναι yield 200- fold, Hdt. 1.193; in measurements, πλέον ἢ ἐ. δύο στάδια X.Cyr.7.5.8
, An.6.2.2; ὅσον ἐ. εἴκοσι σταδίους ib.6.4.5, cf. 1.7.15: freq. with a neut. Adj. or Pron., τόσσον τίς τ' ἐπιλεύσσει ὅσον τ' ἐ. λᾶαν ἵησιν Il.3.12
; ὅσσον ἔφ' 2.616
, cf. 15.358; ἐ. τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω,.. ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι I am prudent enough, not to.., Hdt.6.97; ἐ. ὅσον δεῖ Th.7.66
; ἐ. πάντ' ἀφίξομαι S.OT 265
; ἐ. πᾶν ἐλθεῖν X.An.3.1.18
; ἐ. τὸ ἔσχατον ἀγῶνος ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92
; ἐ. μεῖζον χωρεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι, ib. 117, S.Ph. 259; ἐ. μέγα χωρεῖν δυνάμεως Th.1.118
; ἐ. μακρότερον, ἐ. μακρότατον, Id.4.41, 1.1, Hdt.4.16, 192; ἐ. σμικρόν, ἐ. βραχύ, a little way, a little, S. El. 414, Th.1.118; ἐπ' ἔλαττον, ἐπ' ἐλάχιστον, Pl.Phd. 93b, Th.1.70; ἐπ' ὀλίγον, ἐ. πολλά, Pl.Sph. 254b; ἐ. πλέον still more, Hdt.2.171, 5.51, Th.2.51; rarely with Advs., ἐ. μᾶλλον Hdt.1.94
, 4.181.

d. before, into the presence of (cf. A. 1.2e), ἦγον δή μιν ἐ. τὰ κοινά Id.3.156
(but στὰς ἐ. τὸ συνέδριον standing at the door of the council, Id.8.79); ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18
.

e. in Military phrases (cf. A. 1.2d), ἐπ' ἀσπίδας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐτάξαντο, i.e. twenty-five in file, Th.4.93; dub. in X., as ἐ. πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι many in file, An.4.8.11 codd.; ἐπ' ὀλίγον τὸ βάθος γίγνεσθαι Cyr.7.5.2
codd.; for ἐ. κέρας v. infr.3.

3. of the quarter or direction towards or in which a thing takes place, ἐ. δεξιά, ἐπ' ἀριστερά, to the right or left, Il.7.238, 12.240, Od.3.171, Hdt.6.33, etc.; ἐ. τὰ ἕτερα or ἐ. θάτερα, Id.5.74, Th.1.87, etc.; ἐ. τὰ μακρότερα , βραχύτερα, on the longer, shorter side, Hdt.1.50; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα νοέων both ways, Id.8.22; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τέλος Pi.O.13.57
, etc.; ἐ. τάδε Φασήλιδος on this side, Isoc.7.80; ἐ. ἐκεῖνα, v. ἐπέκεινα; ἐφ' ἕν, ἐ. δύο, ἐ. τρία, of space, in one, two, three dimensions, Arist.de An. 404b23, Plot.6.3.13; in Military phrases, ἐ. δόρυ ἀναστρέψαι ,ἐ. ἀσπίδα μεταβαλέσθαι, to the spear or shield side, i.e. to right or left, X.An.4.3.29, Cyr.7.5.6; ἐ. πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, etc., retire on the foot, i.e. facing the enemy, Id.An.5.2.32; so ἐ. κέρας or ἐ. κέρως πλεῖν, etc., sail towards or on the wing, i.e. in column (v. κέρας v11
): metaph., ἐ. τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι, δεινῶσαι, etc., with exaggeration, Th.1.10, 8.74, etc.; ἐ. τὸ πλέον ἀγγέλλεσθαι Id.6.34
; ἐ. τὸ φοβερώτερον ib.83; ἐ. τὰ γελοιότερα ἐπαινέσαι so as to provoke laughter, Pl. Smp. 214e; ἐ. τὰ καλλίω, ἐ. τὰ αἰσχίονα, Id.Plt. 293e; ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον καὶ κάλλιον, ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον καὶ τὸ αἴσχιον, Id.R. 381b; ἐ. τὸ ἄμεινον Orac. ap. D.43.66.

4. in hostile sense, against, ἰέναι ἐ. νέας Il. 13.101
; ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτούς 5.590
; στρατεύεσθαι or -εύειν ἐ. τινα, Hdt. 1.71,77, Th.1.26, etc.; ἰέναι ἐ. φάτιν S.OT 495
(lyr.); πλεῖν ἐ. τοὺσ Ἀθηναίους Th.2.90
; πέμπειν στρατηγὸν ἐ. τινας Hdt.1.153
; θύεσθαι ἐ. τινα offer sacrifice on going against.., X.An.7.8.21; ἐφ' ὑμᾶς to your prejudice, D.6.33, 10.57.

5. of extension over a space, πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρὴν ἤλυθον over much water, Il.10.27: ἐπ' εὐρέα νῶτα θαλάσσης 2.159
; ἐ. κύματα 13.27
; ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον 1.350
; πλέων, λεύσσων ἐ. οἴνοπα πόντον, 7.88, 5.771; ἐ. πολλὰ δ' ἀλήθην Od. 14.120
; ἄγοισι.. Ἀνδρομάχαν.. ἐπ' ἄλμυρον πόντον Sapph.Supp. 20a
. 7: also with Verbs of Rest, ἐπ' ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα over nine acres he lay stretched, Od.11.577; τόσσον ἔπ' over so much, 5.251, cf. 13.114; διώκοντες ἐ. πολύ over a large space, Th.1.50, cf. 62, etc.; ἐ. πλεῖστον ib.4; ὡς ἐ. πλεῖστον 2.34
, etc.; freq. to be rendered on, δράκων ἐ. νῶτα δαφοινός Il.2.308
; ἵππους.. ἐ. νῶτον ἐΐσας ib. 765; ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει 17.447
; ἐ. γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω [γένη] Hes.Op.11; ἀοιδοὶ ἔασιν ἐ. χθόνα Th.95
; ἐ. γᾶν μέλαιναν ἔμμεναι κάλλιστον Sapph. Supp.5.2
; also, among, κλέος πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους Il.10.213
, cf. 24.202, 535; δασσάμενοι [κτήματ'] ἐφ' ἡμέας Od.16.385
, cf. Pl.Prt. 322d.

II. of Time, for or during a certain time, ἐ. χρόνον Il.2.299
, Od.14.193: πολλὸν ἐ. χρόνον 12.407
; παυρίδιον.. ἐ. χρόνον Hes. Op. 133
; ἐ. δηρόν Il.9.415
; ἐ. πολὺν χρόνον Pl.Phd. 84c
, etc.; ἐπ' ὀλίγον χρόνον Lycurg.7
; ἐ. χρόνον τινά, ἐ. τινα χρόνον, Pl.Prt. 344b, Grg. 524d; γῆν ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐ. δέκα ἔτη Th.3.68
; ἐ. διετές Lexap.D. 46.20; ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας X.An.6.6.36
; τὸ ἐφ' ἡμέραν ἀρκέσον enough for the day, Id.Cyr.6.2.34, cf. D.50.23, Hdt.1.32; ἐ. πολύ for a long time, Th.1.6, etc.

2. up to, until a certain time, εὗδον παννύχιος καὶ ἐπ' ἠῶ καὶ μέσον ἦμαρ Od.7.288
; οὐδ' ἐ. γῆρας ἵκετ' 8.226
.

III. in various causal senses:

1. of the object or purpose for which one goes, ἀγγελίην ἔπι Τυδῆ στεῖλαν sent him for (i.e. to bring) tidings of.., Il.4.384 (dub.); ἐ. βοῦν ἴτω let him go for an ox, Od.3.421; ἐ. τεύχεα δ' ἐσσεύοντο Il.2.808
; ἐλθεῖν πρός τινα ἐπ' ἀργύριον X.Cyr.1.6.12
; πέμπειν εἴς τινα ἐ. στράτευμα ib.4.5.31; ἴτω τις ἐφ' ὕδωρ ib.5.3.49; ἥκειν ἐ. τοὺς τόκους for (i.e. to demand) the interest, D.50.61: less freq. c. acc. pers., ἐπ' Ὀδυσσῆα ἤϊε Od.5.149
, cf. S.OT 555; κατῆλθον ἐ. ποιητήν Ar.Ra. 1418
; κατέρχονται ἐ. τὸν Ἀγόρατον Lys. 13.23
: with acc. of a Noun of Action, ἐξιέναι ἐ. θήραν go out hunting, X.Cyr.1.2.9; ἔπλεον οὐχ ὡς ἐ. ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for -μαχίᾳ) Th.2.83; ἐ. μάχην ἰέναι X.An.1.4.12
; ἔρχεσθαι, ἵζειν ἐ. δεῖπνον, Il.2.381, Od.24.394; ἐ. δόρπον ἀνέστη 12.439
; κληθεὶς ἐ. δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174e
, etc.; καλεῖν ἐ. ξείνια Hdt.2.107
,5.18; ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν to see the sight, Ev.Luc.23.48, cf. PTeb.33.6 (ii B.C.): freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., ἐ. τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν for this purpose, X.An.2.5.22, cf. Th.5.87; ἐπ' αὐτὸ τοῦτο Pl.Grg. 447b
, etc.; ἐ. τί; to what end? Ar.Nu. 256; ἐφ' ὅ τι Id.Lys.22
, 481; ἐφ' ἃ ἤλθομεν for which purpose, Th.7.15, etc.; ἐπὶ ἴσα for like ends, Pi.N.7.5 (but ἐ. ἶσα μάχη τέτατο, = ἴσως, Il.12.436); ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον to a better result, X.An.7.8.4; ἀναστῆσαί τινα ἐ. χριστὸν Θεοῦ set up as God's anointed, LXX 2 Ki.23.1: after an Adj., ἄριστοι πᾶσαν ἐπ' ἰθύν Il.6.79
, cf. Od.4.434; ἄπορος ἐ. φρόνιμα S.OT 691
(lyr.); χρήσιμος ἐ... οὐδέν D.25.31
: after a Noun, ὁδὸς ἐ. τι X.Cyr.1.6.21
; ὄργανα ἐ. τι ib.6.2.34.

2. so far as regards, τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S.Ant. 889
; ὅσον γε τοὐπ' ἐμέ E.Or. 1345
; τοὐπί σε, τὸ ἐ. σέ, Id.Hec. 514, X.Cyr.1.4.12; τὸ ἐ. σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28
; ὡς ἐ. τὸ πολύ for the most part, Arist.Top. 100b29, etc.; ἐ. πᾶν Th.2.51
; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν ξυνετὸν ἐ. πᾶν ἀργόν Id.3.82
; κρείσσων ἐπ' ἀρετήν Democr.181
; ἐ. μέγα Call.Dian.55
.

3. of persons set over others, ἐ. τοὺς πεζοὺς καθιστάναι ἄρχοντα X.Cyr.4.5.58
, cf. HG3.4.20; στρατηγὸς ἐ. τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἐ. τὴν χώραν, Arist.Ath.61.1, IG22.682.24; ἐ. τὸν Πειραιέα Arist.Ath.
l.c.; ἐ. Ῥαμνοῦντα IG2.1206b
(cf. A. 111.1); οἱ θεσμοθέται οἱ ἐ. τοὺς νόμους κληρούμενοι D.20.90
.

4. according to, by, ἐ. στάθμην by the rule, Od.5.245, 21.44, etc.

D. POSITION:— ἐπί may suffer anastrophe ([etym.] ἔπι) and follow its case, as in Il.1.162; it may like wise follow its Verb, ἤλυθ' ἔπι ψυχή Od.24.20
, cf. Il.9.539.

II. in Poets it is sts. put with the second of two Nouns, though in sense it also governs the first, ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐ. γῆς Od.12.27
, cf. S.OT 761, Ant. 367 (lyr.).

E. ABS., used adverbially, without anastrophe, καὶ ἐ. σκέπας ἦν ἀνέμοιο Od.5.443
; κτεῖνον δ' ἐ. μηλοβοτῆρας as well, Il.18.529; esp. ἐ. δέ.. and besides.., Hdt.7.65,75, etc.; πολιαί τ' ἐ. ματέρες S. OT 182
(lyr.).

II. ἔπι, for ἔπεστι, there is, Il.1.515, 3.45, Od.16.315; οὐ γὰρ ἔπ' ἀνήρ.. there is no man.., 2.58; σοὶ δ' ἔ. μὲν μορφὴ ἐπέων 11.367
; ἔ. δέ μοι γέρας A.Eu. 393
codd. (lyr.).

F. PROSODY: in ἐπιόψομαι, ι is not elided before a vowel; also in some words where σ or ϝ has been lost, as ἐπιάλμενος, ἐπιείκελος, ἐπιεικής, ἐπιέξομαι (v. ἐπέχω v11
). [dialect] Dor. ἐπιεργάζομαι (v. ἐπιεργάζομαι).

G. IN COMPOSITION:

I. of Place, denoting,

1. Support or Rest upon, ἔπειμι (A), ἐπίκειμαι, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπαυχένιος, ἐπιβώμιος, etc.

2. Motion,

a. upon or over, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιτρέχω.

b. to or towards, ἐπέρχομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, ἐπαρίστερος, ἐπιδέξιος.

c. against, ἐπαΐσσω, ἐπιπλέω 11
, ἐπιστρατεύω, ἐπιβουλεύω.

d. up to a point, ἐπιτελέω.

e. over a place, as in ἐπαιωρέομαι, ἐπαρτάω.

f. over or beyond boundaries, as in ἐπινέμομαι.

g. implying reciprocity, as in ἐπιγαμία.

3. Extension over a surface, as in ἐπαλείφω, ἐπανθίζω, ἐπιπέτομαι, ἐπιπλέω 1
, ἐπάργυρος, ἐπίχρυσος.

4. Accumulation of one thing over or besides another, as in ἐπαγείρω, ἐπιμανθάνω, ἐπαυξάνω, ἐπιβάλλω, ἐπίκτητος.

5. Accompaniment, to, with, as in ἐπᾴδω, ἐπαυλέω, ἐπαγρυπνέω: hence of Addition, ἐπίτριτος one and 1/3 more, 1 +1/3; so ἐπιτέταρτος, ἐπίπεμπτος, ἐπόγδοος, etc.

6. with Adjs., somewhat, slightly, as in ἐπίξανθος, ἐπίπικρος.

II. of Time and Sequence, after, as in ἐπιβιόω, ἐπιβλαστάνω, ἐπιγίγνομαι, ἐπακόλουθος, ἐπίγονος, ἐπιστάτης 1.2
.

III. in causal senses:

1. Superiority felt over or at, as in ἐπιχαίρω, ἐπιγελάω, ἐπαισχύνομαι.

2. Authority over, as in ἐπικρατέω, ἔπαρχος, ἐπιβουκόλος, ἐπιποιμήν.

3. Motive for, as in ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιθάνατος.

4. to give force or intensity to the Verb, as in ἐπαινέω, ἐπιμέμφομαι, ἐπικείρω, ἐπικλάω.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπί
26 ἐΰς

ἐΰς, ὁ (v. εὖ),

A good, brave, noble, [dialect] Ep. word freq. in nom., ἐῒς πάϊς Ἀγχίσαο Il.2.819
, etc.; once in acc. ἐΰν 8.303
; neut. always ἠΰ (v. ἠΰς ) (εὖ only as Adv.): irreg. gen. sg. ἐῆος, παιδὸς ἐῆος 1.393
; υἷος ἐῆος 15.138
, 24.422, 550; ἀνδρὸς ἐῆος 19.342
; φιλότητι καὶ αἰδοῖ φωτὸς ἐῆος Od.14.505
; always at end of verse (exc. in Od.15.450): freq. with v.l. ἑοῖο, as Il.18.71: irreg. gen. pl. ἐάων good things, good fortune, 24.528; θεοὶ δωτῆρες ἐάων Od.8.325
; δῶτορ ἐάων ib. 335, h.Hom.18.12, 29.8, cf. Hes.Th.46, 111. ((I) ἐῆος: for this form Zenod. read ἑοῖο; but ἐῆος ( = ἀγαθοῦ, Sch.Il.15.138) became, like ἐσθλός (v. ἐσθλός 1.3
) and φίλος, almost a possess. Pron. of [ per.] 1st, [ per.] 2nd, and [ per.] 3rd pers., and may be retained. Some Gramm. wrongly took εηος to be a form of ἑός ('his') and conversely gave to ἑός ('his') the signf. 'good' (Anon. ap. A.D.Synt.156.1, EM307.33,318.1): hence the erroneous forms ἑῆος, ἑάων (but ἐΰς rightly), Lex. de Spir.pp.194,196, 198, freq. in codd. The reading ἐῆος ([etym.] ἑῆος ) is well attested only where a substituted ἑοῖο would have had to mean my or thy: where the reference is to the [ per.] 3rd pers. we find υἷος ἑοῖο, πατρὸς ἑοῖο, παιδὸς ἑοῖο almost without v.l., Il.13.522, al. (v.l. ἑῆος Il.14.9, 18.71, 138). (2 ) The origin of the forms ἐῆος ἐάων and the variation ἐϋ-: ἠϋ- are obscure: ἐάων perh. had ϝ-, Il.24.528.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐΰς
27 ἔωρτο

ἔωρτο,

A v. ἀείρω. [full] ἕως (A) ἡ, [dialect] Att. form of the [dialect] Ion. ἠώς (q. v.).

------------------------------------

ἕως (B), [dialect] Ep. [full] εἵως, [full] ἧος (v. sub fin.), [dialect] Dor. [full] ἇς, [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἆς (qq.v.), [dialect] Boeot. [full] ἇς IG7.3303, al., and [full] ἅως ib.2228, 3315.

A Relat. Particle, expressing the point of Time up to which an action goes, with reference to the end of the action, until, till; or to its continuance, while:

I until, till,

1 with Ind., of a fact in past time, θῦνε διὰ προμάχων, ἧος φίλον ὤλεσε θυμόν Il.11.342
, cf. Od.5.123; ἕ. ἀπώλεσέν τε καὐτὸς ἐξαπώλετο S.Fr. 236
, cf. A.Pers. 428, Pl.Chrm. 155c, etc.; for πρίν, μὴ πρότερον ἀπελθεῖν ἕως ἀποκατέστησε τὰ πράγματα D.S.27.4
: with [tense] impf. with ἄν in apodosi, of an unaccomplished action, ἡδέως ἂν Καλλικλεῖ διελεγόμην, ἕ. ἀπέδωκα I would have gone on conversing till I had.., Pl.Grg. 506b, cf.Cra. 396c.

2 ἕ. ἄν or κε with Subj. (mostly of [tense] aor.), of an event at an uncertain future time, μαχήσομαι.. ἧός κε τέλος πολέμοιο κιχείω till I find, Il.3.291, cf. 24.183, A.Pr. 810, etc.: ἄν is sts. omitted in Trag., ἕ. μάθῃς S.Aj. 555
; ἕ. κληθῇ Id.Tr. 148
; ἕ. ἀνῇ τὸ πῆμα Id.Ph. 764
: so freq. in later Gr., UPZ18.10 (ii B. C.), PGrenf. 2.38.16 (i B. C.), Ev.Marc.14.32, Vett. Val.68.18, etc.; ἕ. οὗ γένηται Gem.8.32
.

3 ἕ. with Opt. (mostly of [tense] aor.), relating to an event future in relation to past time, ὦρσε.. Βορέην, ἧος ὃ Φαιήκεσσι.. μιγείη caused it to blow, till he should reach.., Od.5.386, cf. 9.376, Ar.Ra. 766, Pl.Phd. 59d; ἕως δέοι βοηθεῖν Th.3.102
, cf.Lys.13.25: ἄν or κε is added to the Opt. (not to ἕως), if the event is represented as conditional, ἕ. κ' ἀπὸ πάντα δοθείη till (if possible) all things should be given back, Od.2.78; οὐκ [ἂν] ἀποκρίναιο, ἕ. ἂν σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
, cf. S.Tr. 687 codd., Isoc.17.15, IG22.1328 (ii B.C.).

b in orat. obliq., ἔδωκεν.. ἕ. ἀνὴρ εἶναι δοκιμασθείην D.27.5
.

c by assimilation to an opt. with ἄν, [λόγον] ἂν διδοίης ἕ. ἔλθοις Pl.Phd. 101d
.

4 c. subj. or opt., expressing purpose, in order that, Od.4.800, 6.80, 19.367; πορεύου εἰς Διονυσιάδα.. ἕως τὸν ἐκεῖ ἐλαιῶνα ποτίσῃς PFay.118.12
(ii A. D.); σπούδασον ἕως οὗ ἀγοράσῃ κτλ. POxy.113.25 (ii A. D.); χρυσίον ἐδανισάμην ἕως ὅτε δυνηθῶ ἀγοράσαι ib.130.13 (vi A. D.).

5 with Inf. in orat. obliq., ἐντειλάμενος διεκπλέειν ἕ... ἀπικνέεσθαι Hdt.4.42
: otherwise only in later Gr., ἕ. ἐλθεῖν ἐς.. LXX Ge.10.19
, cf. PLond. 1.131r251 (i A. D.), D.H.9.4 (v.l.), Anon. ap. Suid.s.v. ἰλυσπώμενον.

6 with Advbs. of Time and Place, ἕ. ὅτε till the time when, c. ind., v.l. for ἔστε in X.Cyr.5.1.25; ἕ. οὗ, f.l. for ἐς οὗ, Hdt.2.143: freq. in later Gr., Gem.l.c., Ev.Matt.1.25, etc.; ἕ. ὅτου ib.5.25, etc.; ἕ. πότε; how long? ib.17.17, Ev.Jo.10.24; ἕ. τότε LXX Ne.2.16
; ἕ. ὀψέ till late, f.l.for ἐς ὀψέ, Th.3.108; ἕ. ἄρτι 1 Ep.Jo.2.9
; ἕ. ὧδε as far as this place, Ev.Luc.23.5.

b with Preps., of Time, ἕ. πρὸς καλὸν ἑῷον ἀστέρα AP5.200
; of Place, ἕ. εἰς τὸν χάρακα Plb.1.11.14
; ἕ. πρὸς τὸν Καύκασον D.S.2.43
; ἕ. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Act.Ap.17.14
.

II as Prep.,

1 of Time, c. gen., until, ἕως τοῦ ἀποτεῖσαι until he has made payment, Lexap.Aeschin.1.42, cf. LXX Ge.3.19, etc.; ἕ. τελειώσεως Epicur.Ep. 2p.38U.
; ἕ. ὡρισμένων χρόνων Phld.D.1.7
; ἕ. τινός for a time, Parth. 9.2, etc.; ἕ. τοῦ νῦν Ev.Matt.24.21
; ἕ. Ἰωάννου ib.11.13.

b of Place,
ἕ. τοῦ γενέσθαι..
up to the point where.. Arist.PA 668b2
, cf. HA 630b27, Plb.9.36.1; as far as, ἕ. Σάρδεων Ath.Mitt.44.25
(Samos, iii B.C.); ἕ. τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ PTeb.33.5
(ii B.C.); ἕ. Φοινίκης Act.Ap.11.19
: so c. gen. pers., ἦλθον ἕ. αὐτοῦ Ev.Luc.4.42
, cf. LXX 4 Ki. 4.22.

c of Number or Degree, ἕ. τριῶν πλοίων Docum. ap. D.18.106; διδόναι ἕ. ταλάντων ἑκατόν LXX 1 Es.8.19(21)
; οὐκ ἔστιν ἕ. ἑνός ib.Ps. 13.3; οὐκ ἔχομεν ἕ. τῆς τροφῆς τῶν κτηνῶν PTeb.56.7
(ii B.C.); ἐᾶτε ἕ. τούτου Ev.Luc.22.51
; μαχοῦμαι ἕ. ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου OGI266.29
(Pergam., iii B.C.); ἕ. μέθης Corn.ND30
.

2 rarely c. acc., ἕ. πρωΐ LXX Jd.19.25
; ἕ. μεσημβρίαν PLond.1.131r346
, 515 (i A.D.); ἕ. τὸ βωμῷ down to the word " βωμῷ", Sch.Pi.O.6.111.

III while, so long as, c. ind., ἧος ἐνὶ Τροίῃ πολεμίζομεν Od.13.315
, cf.17.358, 390; ἕ. δ' ἔτ' ἔμφρων εἰμί A.Ch. 1026
, cf. Pers. 710 (troch.); ἕ. ἔτι ἐλπὶς [ἦν] Th.8.40; ἕ. ἔτινέος εἶ Pl.Prm. 135d
: in this sense answered in apodosi by τῆος, Od.4.90, Il.20.41; by τόφρα, Od.12.327, Il.18.15; by τόφρα δέ, 10.507; by δέ alone, 1.193, Od.4.120 codd.

b ἕ. ἄν c.subj., when the whole action is future, οὔ μοι.. ἐλπίς, ἕ. ἂν αἴθῃ πῦρ A.Ag. 1435
; λέγειν τε χρὴ καὶ ἐρωτᾶν, ἕως ἂν ἐῶσιν Pl.Phd. 85b
; οὐδὲν ἔστ' αὐτῷ βεβαίως ἔχειν ἕ. ἂν ὑμεῖς δημοκρατῆσθε D.10.13
.

c ἕως c. opt. in a Conditional relative clause, φήσομεν μηδὲν ἂν μεῖζον μηδὲ ἔλαττον γενέσθαι ἕ. ἴσον εἴη αὐτὸ ἐαυτῷ Pl.Tht. 155a
.

B in Hom. sts. Demonstr.,= τέως, for a time, ἧος μὲν.. ὄρνυον· αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ.. Il.12.141
; ἧος μὲν ἀπείλει.. · ἀλλ' ὅτε δὴ.. 13.143
, cf. 17.727, 730, Od.2.148; ἧος μὲν.. ἕποντο.. αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ.. Il.15.277
; all that time, Od.3.126, cf. Hdt.8.74. ( ἕως, as iambus, only once in Hom., Od.2.78; as a monosyll., Il.17.727, dub.l. in Od.2.148; when the first syllable is to be long codd. Hom. have εἵως or ἕως (never εἷος or ἧος, Ludwich WkP1890.512, exc. ειος v.l. (PFay. 160 ) in Il.20.41), 3.291, 11.342, al.; εἵως (or ἕως) is found even when the metre requires a trochee, 1.193, al.; comparison of [dialect] Dor. ἇς (from Αος ) with [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. ἕως points to early [dialect] Ion. Ηος (cf. Skt. yāvat 'as great as, as long as, until') and this should prob. be restored in Hom.; cf. τέως.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἔωρτο
28 πνεῦμα

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 308ff).

① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)

ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).

ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).

② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen² 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.² 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.

③ a part of human personality, spirit

ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X⁷ 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.

ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).

ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.

④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).

ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).

ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.

ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.

⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.

ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.

ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.

ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).

β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.

ⓓ abs.

α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).

β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.

ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.

ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.

ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.

α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.

β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.

γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).

δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.

⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).

ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.

ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).

ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.

ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.

ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.

ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.

⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.

⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen² 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines⁶ 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes² 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα
29 ἀδελφός

ἀδελφός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom. [ἀδελφεός]+; accord. to B-D-F §13; Schwyzer I 555; Mlt-H. II 58; PKatz, TLZ 83, ’58, 315f vocative ἄδελφε should be accented on the antepenult in Ac 9:17; 21:20 contrary to the practice of the editions; also GPt 2:5.)

① a male from the same womb as the reference pers., brother, Mt 1:2, 11; 4:18, 21 al.; τὸν ἀ. τ. ἴδιον J 1:41 (s. Jos., Ant. 11, 300). Of Jesus’ brothers (passages like Gen 13:8; 14:14; 24:48; 29:12; Lev 10:4; 1 Ch 9:6 do not establish the mng. ‘cousin’ for ἀ.; they only show that in rendering the Hebr. אָח ἀ. is used loosely in isolated cases to designate masc. relatives of various degrees. The case of ἀδελφή [q.v. 1] is similar Gen 24:59f; Tob 8:4, 7 [cp. 7:15]; Jos., Ant. 1, 211 [ἀδελφή = ἀδελφοῦ παῖς]. Sim. M. Ant., who [1, 14, 1] uses ἀ. for his brother-in-law Severus; the same use is found occas. in the pap: JCollins, TS 5, ’44, 484–94; s. VTscherikover HTR ’42, 25–44) Mt 12:46f; 13:55; Mk 3:31f; J 2:12; 7:3, 5; Ac 1:14; 1 Cor 9:5. James ὁ ἀδελφὸς τοῦ κυρίου Gal 1:19. The pl. can also mean brothers and sisters (Eur., El. 536; Andoc. 1, 47 ἡ μήτηρ ἡ ἐκείνου κ. ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμὸς ἀδελφοί; Anton. Diog. 3 [Erot. Gr. I 233, 23; 26 Hercher]; POxy 713, 21f [97 A.D.] ἀδελφοῖς μου Διοδώρῳ κ. Θαί̈δι; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 11 [p. 5, 9] δύο ἐγένοντο ἀδελφοί, Φάλαγξ μὲν ἄρσην, θήλεια δὲ Ἀράχνη τοὔνομα. The θεοὶ Ἀδελφοί, a married couple consisting of brother and sister on the throne of the Ptolemies: OGI 50, 2 [III B.C.] and pap [Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 99; I/2, 103–7, III B.C.]). In all these cases only one brother and one sister are involved. Yet there are also passages in which ἀδελφοί means brothers and sisters, and in whatever sequence the writer chooses (Polyb. 10, 18, 15 ποιήσεσθαι πρόνοιαν ὡς ἰδίων ἀδελφῶν καὶ τέκνων; Epict. 1, 12, 20 ἀδ. beside γονεῖς, τέκνα, γείτονες; 1, 22, 10; 4, 1, 111; Artem. 3, 31; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 6; Diog. L. 7, 108; 120; 10, 18. In PMich 214, 12 [296 A.D.] οἱ ἀδελφοί σου seems to be even more general=‘your relatives’). Hence there is no doubt that in Lk 21:16 ἀδελφοί=brothers and sisters, but there is some room for uncertainty in the case of the ἀδελφοί of Jesus in Mt 12:46f; Mk 3:31; J 2:12; 7:3, 5; Ac 1:14.

② a pers. viewed as a brother in terms of a close affinity, brother, fellow member, member, associate fig. ext. of 1.

ⓐ one who shares beliefs (for an associated duality, s. Did., Gen. 127, 6 ἀ. ἐστι τοῦ φαινομένου ἔξω ἀνθρώπου ὁ κρυπτὸς καὶ ἐν διανοίᾳ ἄνθρωπος=brother to the man as he appears from without is the man who is hidden in thought): Jesus calls everyone who is devoted to him brother Mt 12:50; Mk 3:35, esp. his disciples Mt 28:10; J 20:17. Hence gener. for those in such spiritual communion Mt 25:40; Hb 2:12 (Ps 21:23), 17 al. Of a relationship w. a woman other than that of husband Hs 9, 11, 3 al.; 2 Cl 12:5.—Of the members of a relig. community (PParis 20 [II B.C.] al. of the hermits at the Serapeum in Memphis; UPZ 162 I, 20 [117 B.C.] ἀδελφοὶ οἱ τὰς λειτουργίας ἐν ταῖς νεκρίαις παρεχόμενοι; IG XIV, 956 B, 11f. ἀ.=member of the ἱερὰ ξυστικὴ σύνοδος; IPontEux II, 449f εἰσποιητοὶ ἀ. σεβόμενοι θεὸν Ὕψιστον [Ltzm. ZWT 55, 1913, 121]. Mystery pap [III A.D.]: APF 13, ’39, 212. Essenes in Jos., Bell. 2, 122. Vett. Val. 172, 31; Cleopatra ln. 94. See GMilligan 1908 on 1 Th 1:4; Ltzm. Hdb. on Ro 1:13 [lit.]; Dssm. B 82f, 140 [BS 87f, 142]; Nägeli 38; Cumont³ 276). Hence used by Christians in their relations w. each other Ro 8:29, 1 Cor 5:11; Eph 6:23; 1 Ti 6:2; Ac 6:3; 9:30; 10:23; Rv 1:9; 12:10; IEph 10:3; ISm 12:1 al. So esp. w. proper names (for ἀδ. in a figurative sense used with a name, cp. the address of a letter PMich 162 verso [II A.D.] ἀπὸ Ἀπλωναρίου ἀδελφοῦ) to indicate membership in the Christian community Ro 16:23; 1 Cor 1:1; 16:12; 2 Cor 1:1; Phil 2:25; Col 1:1; 4:7, 9; 1 Th 3:2; Phlm 1; 1 Pt 5:12; 2 Pt 3:15; AcPl Ha 1, 30 al. Completely ἀδελφὸς ἐν κυρίῳ Phil 1:14. Oft. in direct address 1 Cl 1:1 (cod. A); 4:7; 13:1; 33:1; 2 Cl 20:2 al.; B 2:10; 3:6 al.; IRo 6:2; Hv 2, 4, 1; 3, 1, 1; 4; AcPl Ha 7, 4; 8, 21; AcPlCor 1:16. ἀδελφοί μου B 4:14; 5:5; 6:15; IEph

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀδελφός
30 ἀπό

ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.

① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from

ⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.

ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.

ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.

ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.

ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.

ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.

② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.

ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.

ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).

α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.

β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.

γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.³-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.

ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).

α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).

β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.

③ to indicate origin or source, from

ⓐ lit., with verbs of motion

α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.

β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.

ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.

ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.

ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.

ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).

④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).

⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcome

ⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).

ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).

ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).

ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer⁶-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).

ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of

α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.

β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.

⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.² 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπό
31 ἐγγίζω

ἐγγίζω (fr. ἐγγύς) Att. fut. ἐγγιῶ; 1 aor. ἤγγισα; Att. reduplication ἐνήγγισα and ἠνήγγισα GJs (deStrycker 242 and 299f); pf. 3 pl. ἠγγίκασιν Dt 31:14. In our lit. only intr. approach, come near (so in Aristot., Polyb., Diod S, Epict. et al., pap, LXX, En; OdeSol 11:6; TestSol, TestAbr B, TestJob, Test12Patr, JosAs 3:2; GrBar 12:6; MartIs, ApcMos, Philo, Joseph.; Tat. 37, 1; s. Nägeli 36; Anz 344f; KClark, JBL 59, ’40, 367–74)

① to move in space and so draw closer to a reference point, draw near, come near, approach of humans and transcendent beings.

ⓐ abs. of someone approaching (Gen 18:23; 27:27) Ac 23:15; ἤγγικεν ὁ παραδιδούς με my betrayer is near Mt 26:46; Mk 14:42; thief Lk 12:33; the tribune Ac 21:33; blind man Lk 18:40; Jesus 19:41; 24:15.

ⓑ modified

α. without prep.: W. gen. of thing (Gen. 33:3; Jdth 13:7; En 14:9) ἐγγίσαντες αὐτοῦ when they came near it (the grave) AcPl Ha 11, 19. W. dat. of pers. (Gen 27:21; TestAbr B 2, p. 106, 4 [Stone p. 60]) or thing (Polyb. 18, 4, 1; Ex 32:19; Jos., Bell. 5, 408 τ. πόλει) τῷ παιδί B 6:1 (Is 50:8); τῇ πύλῃ τῆς πόλεως the city gate Lk 7:12; the house 15:25; Damascus Ac 9:3; 22:6; cp. 10:9; the grave GPt 9:36.—Jesus Lk 15:1; 22:47. τῷ θεῷ draw near to God (Philo, Leg. All. 2, 57, Deus Imm. 161; Theodor. Prodr. 7, 475 H. θεοῖς ἐγγ.) of priestly service (Ex 19:22; 34:30; Lev 10:3 al.), fig. of the spiritual service of Christians Hb 7:19; Js 4:8; Mt 15:8 v.l. (cp. Jdth 8:27; Ps 148:14; Is 29:13 al.).

β. w. prep.: W. εἰς, only with indications of place (Tob 11:1; En 14:10): Jerusalem Mt 21:1; Mk 11:1.—Lk 18:35; 19:29. εἰς τὴν κώμην to the village 24:28; εἰς συναγωγήν Hm 11:13.—W. πρός and dat. to show place (Pr 5:8; OdeSol 11:6 πρὸς τὰ χείλη μου) Lk 19:37. W. ἐπί, τινα Lk 10:9 (cp. Ps 26:2; 68:4 v.l.; ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν AcPl Ha 3, 30; ἐπὶ μίλιον τρίτον for three miles GJs 17:2).

② to draw near in a temporal sense, draw near, come near, approach (POxy 1202, 8; w. dat., Epict. 3, 10, 14; Tat. 37:1). W. indications of time (KClark, JBL 59, ’40, 367–83) the hour Mt 26:45; the day (Ezk 7:4; 12:23) Ro 13:12; Hb 10:25; the (feast) day GJs 1:2; 2:2; ὁ καιρός (La 4:18; 1 Macc 9:10) Lk 21:8; cp. Mt 21:34; ὁ χρόνος Ac 7:17; the Passover Lk 22:1; the end 1 Pt 4:7; the final stumbling-block B 4:3; cp. ending of Mk in the Freer ms. 8; the judgment GPt 7:25; destruction of the temple Lk 21:20; redemption vs. 28. μέχρι θανάτου ἐ. come close to dying Phil 2:30 (cp. Job 33:22; Sir 51:6 ἤγγισεν ἕως θανάτου). PKatz, TZ 5, ’49, 7; ADebrunner, Mus. Helv. 11, ’54, 58f.—Esp. of the approaching Reign of God: ἤγγικεν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν (or τοῦ θεοῦ) Mt 3:2; 4:17; 10:7; Mk 1:15; Lk 10:9, 11 (WHutton, ET 64, ’52/53, 89–91: has come for the Lk passages); AcPl Ha 8, 31=BMM verso 2f. Of the Lord’s return Js 5:8.—On ‘realized eschatology’ s. CDodd, Parables of the Kgdm.³ ’36, 44–51, ET 48, ’36/37, 138–42; JCampbell, ET 48, ’36/37, 91–94; RFuller, The Mission and Achievement of Jesus ’54, 20–25; RBerkey, JBL 82, ’63, 177–87; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 208–11.—DELG s.v. ἐγγύς. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐγγίζω
32 εἰμί

εἰμί (

A sum), [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἔμμι Sapph.2.15, Theoc.20.32; Cret. [full] ἠμί GDI 4959a; [ per.] 2sg. εἶ, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. εἰς Od.17.388
, al., [dialect] Aeol. ἔσσι, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Dor. ἐσσί Il.1.176
, Pi.O.6.90, Sophr.134; ἐσί GDI4959a
; [ per.] 3sg. ἐστί, [dialect] Dor. ἐντί IG12(1).677
([place name] Rhodes), Theoc.1.17, etc.; [ per.] 3 dual ἐστόν Th.3.112
; [ per.] 1pl. ἐσμέν, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. εἰμέν (also in Pi.P.3.60), ἐμέν Call.Fr. 294
, [dialect] Dor. εἰμές Theoc.15.73
, but ἠμέν GDI5178.34
; [ per.] 3pl. εἰσί ([etym.] - ίν), [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἔασι ([etym.] - ιν) Il.7.73, Xenoph.8.1, Antim.29, Herod.4.84, [dialect] Dor. ἐντί Pi.N.1.24
, Theoc.11.45, IG9(1).32.22 ([place name] Phocis), etc.: imper. ἴσθι ( ἔσθι Hecat.361
J.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also in [voice] Med. form ἔσσο Od.3.200
, Sapph.1.28, Maced.Pae.31, late Prose ἔσο Plu.2.241d
, M.Ant.3.5, Hld.5.12, Porph.Marc.34; [ per.] 3sg. ἔστω ( ἤτω LXXPs.103.31
, and late Inscrr., CIG2664, al.; but in Pl.R. 361c leg. ἴτω), [dialect] Dor. εἴτω, ἤτω, Heraclid. ap. Eust.1411.21, Elean ἤστω Schwyzer 424
; [ per.] 3pl. ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων Hom.
, Pl.R. 502a, ὄντων Id.Lg. 879b
, and early [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.22, etc. ( ἔστωσαν first in ii B. C., ib.22.1328), [dialect] Dor. ἐόντων ib.1126: subj. ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, [dialect] Ep. ἔω Od.9.18
; [ per.] 3sg. ἔῃ Il.12.300
,al. (also ἔῃσι 2.366
, al., ᾖσι ([etym.] ν) 19.202, Hes.Op. 294), also [dialect] Boeot. ἔνθω IG7.3172.165
, μετείω Il.23.47
and perh. εἴῃ 9.245
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ὦντι SIG940.3
([place name] Crete), ἔωντι GDI5040.14
([place name] Hierapytna), [dialect] Boeot. ἴωνθι IG7.3171.46
(iii B. C.): opt. εἴην, -ης ( εἴησθα Thgn.715
), -η, also ἔοις, ἔοι, Il.9.284, 142, al., cf. Hdt.7.6; [ per.] 3pl. εἴοισαν Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1911.133
([place name] Gonni); [ per.] 3 dual εἴτην Pl. Prm. 149e
, Sph. 243e; [ per.] 1pl. εἶμεν E.Alc. 921
(lyr.), Pl.; [ per.] 2pl. εἶτε Od. 21.195
; [ per.] 3pl. εἶεν Il.2.372
, etc., εἴησαν Hdt.1.2
, etc.; Elean ἔα, = εἴη, SIG9 (vi B. C.), and σύν-εαν, = συνεῖεν, GDI 1149 (vi B. C.): inf. εἶναι, Arc. ἦναι SIG306.9
(Tegea, iv B. C.); [dialect] Ep. ἔμμεναι (also [dialect] Aeol. ἔμμεν' Sapph.34
), ἔμμεν (also Pi.P.6.42, S.Ant. 623 (lyr.)), ἔμεναι, ἔμεν, also ἔμειν SIG1166
([place name] Dodona); [dialect] Dor. εἶμεν Foed. ap. Th.5.77,79, IG7.1.7 ([place name] Megara), ἦμεν Test.Epict.5.16
, Tab.Heracl.1.75, Cret. ἦμεν or ἤμην Leg.Gort.1.15
, al., GDI4998i 2, al., Megar. εἴμεναι Ar.Ach. 775
, εἴμειν IG12(1).155.100
([place name] Rhodes), 14.952 ([place name] Agrigentum); εἶν ib. 12(9).211.10 ([place name] Eretria), SIG135.4 ([place name] Olynthus), etc.: part. ὤν, [dialect] Ep. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, Cypr. ἰών Inscr.Cypr.135.23
H.; [dialect] Boeot. fem. ἰῶσα IG 7.3172.116
(Orchom.), [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. fem. ἔσσα Sapph.75.4
, IG4.952.2 (Epid.), Theoc.28.16, ἐοῖσα Pi.P.4.265
, ἔασσα Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 9
, Diotog. ap. Stob.4.7.62, εὖσα Erinn.5.5
(also [dialect] Ion., Herod.5.16, εὔντων 2.85
), ἐᾶσα Ti.Locr.96d
, IG5(1).1470.8 ([place name] Messene), ἴαττα Leg.Gort.8.47
; acc. sg. εὖντα Theoc.2.3
; nom. sg. εἴς in Heraclid. ap. Eust.1756.13, pl. ἔντες Tab.Heracl.1.117
; dat. pl. ἔντασσι ib.104; gen. pl. παρ-έντων Alcm. 64
: [tense] impf. ἦν Il.2.77
, etc., [dialect] Ep. ἔον (also [dialect] Aeol., Alc.127, Sapph.Oxy. 1787 Fr.3 ii 21), in [dialect] Att. ἦ (dub. in [dialect] Aeol., Alc. Supp.14.9), Ar.Pl.77, Pl.Phd. 61b, etc., but usu. altered to ἦν in codd. (and ἦν is required by metre in E. Ion 280), [var] contr. from [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἦα (Il.5.808, al., IG12(8).449.2 ([place name] Thasos), whence Hom.and later [dialect] Ion. ἔᾱ Il.4.321
, al., ἔας Hdt.1.187
, ἔατε Id.4.119
); [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. ἦεν, always with ν in Hom.; ἔην as [ per.] 1sg., only Il.11.762 (s. v.l., al. ἔον), freq. as [ per.] 3sg. (generally before a consonant, so that ἔεν is possible), sts. also ἤην; [ per.] 2sg. ἦσθα, later ἦς (wh. is v.l. in Pi.I.1.26), sts. in LXX (Jd. 11.35, Ru.3.2,al.), cf. Pl.Ax. 365e, Erinn.4.4, Ev.Matt.25.21, al., ἦσθας Men.Epit. 156
, [dialect] Ep. ἔησθα; [ per.] 3sg. ἦν, [dialect] Ep. ἔην, ἤην, ἦεν (v. supr.), [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. ἦς Alc.Supp.30.1
, Epich.102, Sophr.59, Theoc.2.90, SIG241.145 (Delph.); [ per.] 3 dual ἤστην Il.5.10
, E.Hipp. 387, Ar.Eq. 982, Pl.Euthd. 272a, al.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 1pl. ἦμες Plu.Lyc.21
; [ per.] 2pl. ἦτε Pl.Euthd. 276c
, ἦστε Ar. Pax 821
, Ec. 1086; [ per.] 3pl. ἦσαν, [dialect] Ion. and Poet. ἔσαν (in Hes.Th. 321, 825, ἦν is not pl. for ἦσαν, but is rather a peculiarity of syntax, v. infr. v, but is [ per.] 3pl. in Epich.46, al., SIG560.15 (Epidamnus, iii B. C.)); [dialect] Aeol. ἔον Schwyzer 644.12
; later ἤμην PSI4.362.21
(iii B. C.), SIG527.46 (Crete, iii B. C.), IGRom.4.1740 ([place name] Cyme), always in LXX as Ba.1.19, cf. Ev.Matt.23.30, Plu.2.174a, etc., and sts. in codd. of earlier writers, Lys.7.34, Trag.Adesp. 124 (cited from E. Hel. 931 by Choerob. and from Id.Tr. 474 by Aps.), X.Cyr.6.1.9, Hyp.Ath.26, [ per.] 2sg. ἦσο Epigr.Gr.379
([place name] Aezani), [ per.] 3sg. ἦστο Supp.Epigr. 1.455.7
([place name] Phrygia), [ per.] 1pl. ἤμεθα PPetr.2p.11
(iii B. C.), LXX Ba.1.19, 1 Ki.25.16, Ep.Eph.2.3; subj. ὦμαι PBaden 48.12
(ii B. C.), ἦται GDI 1696, ἦνται prob. in IG5(1).1390.83 ([place name] Andania); [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. also ἔσκον, used by A.Pers. 656 (lyr.): [tense] fut. ἔσομαι, ἔσται, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Aeol. also ἔσσομαι, ἔσεται, ἔσσεται; [dialect] Aeol. [ per.] 2sg. ἔσσῃ prob. in Alc.67,87; [dialect] Dor. 2 and [ per.] 3sg. ἐσσῇ, ἐσσεῖται, Il.2.393, 13.317, Theoc.10.5, [ per.] 3pl. ἐσσοῦνται Foed. ap. Th.5.77 codd. (but ἔσσονται Tab.Heracl.1.113
), inf. ἐσσεῖσθαι Sophr.57
.—All forms of the [tense] pres.ind. are enclitic (exc. [ per.] 2sg. εἶ and [ per.] 3pl. ἔασι); but [ per.] 3sg. is written ἔστι when it begins a sentence or verse, or when it immediately follows οὐκ, καί, εἰ, ὡς, ἀλλά, or τοῦτ', Hdn.Gr.1.553 (also μή acc. to EM301.3); later Gramm. wrote ἔστι as Subst. Verb, Phot., Eust.880.22.

A as the Subst. Verb,

I of persons, exist, οὐκ ἔσθ' οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ' ἔσσεται Od.16.437
; ἔτ' εἰσί they are still in being, 15.433, cf. S.Ph. 445, etc.; τεθνηῶτος.. μηδ' ἔτ' ἐόντος Od.1.289
; οὐκέτ' ἐστί he is no more, E.Hipp. 1162; οὐδὲ δὴν ἦν he was not long- lived, Il.6.131; ὁ οὐκ ὤν, οἱ οὐκ ὄντες, of those who are no more, Th.2.45,44; οἱ ὄντες the living, Plb.9.29.2; ὁ ὤν the Eternal, LXX Ex.3.14, al., Ph.1.289; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.1.290
; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, 2.119; κἀγὼ γὰρ ἦ ποτ', ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐκ εἴμ' ἔτι E.Hec. 284
; ὡς ἂν εἶεν ἅνθρωποι might continue in being, Pl.Smp. 190c; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων D.18.72
, cf. Arist.GC 318b25; of things, εἰ ἔστι ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.3.17, etc.; of cities, ὄλωλεν, οὐδ' ἔτ' ἐστὶ Τροία E.Tr. 1292
, cf. Heracl. 491; δοκεῖ μοι Καρχηδόνα μὴ εἶναι censeo Carthaginem esse delendam, Plu.Cat.Ma.27; ἂν ᾖ τὸ στράτευμα be in existence, D.8.17; of money, to be in hand, τῶν ὄντων χρημάτων καὶ τῶν προσιόντων IG12.91.25
; τὰ ὄντα property, Pl.Grg. 511a, Plu.Ant.24, etc.; τὸ ἐσόμενον ἐκ .. future revenue from.., BCH46.420 (Olymos, i B. C.); of place, τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν the local church, Act.Ap.13.1; of time, τοῦ ὄντος μηνός in the current month, BGU146.4, etc.; in office, ἱερέων τῶν ὄντων PPar.5.4
(ii B. C.); αἱ οὖσαι [ἐξουσίαι] the powers that be, Ep. Rom.13.1.

II of the real world, be, opp. become, γίγνεται πάντα ἃ δή φαμεν εἶναι Pl.Tht. 152d
, etc.; τὸ ὄν Being, Parm.8.35, Protag.2, Pl.Ti. 27d, etc.; opp. τὸ μὴ ὄν, Gorg.Fr.3 D., etc.; οὐδὲν γίνεται ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος Epicur.Ep. 1p.5U.
; ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων ἐποίησεν αὐτὰ ὁ θεός LXX 2 Ma.7.28
; τὰ ὄντα the world of things, Heraclit.7, Emp.129.5, etc.; ὄνindecl., τῶν ὂν εἰδῶν species of Being, Plot.6.2.10.

2 of circumstances, events, etc., to happen, τά τ' ἐόντα, τά τ' ἐσσόμενα, πρό τ' ἐόντα Il.1.70
; ἡ ἐσβολὴ ἔμελλεν ἔσεσθαι Th.2.13
, etc.; τῆς προδοσίας οὔσης since treachery was there, Id.4.103; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ᾖ so long as it last, Id.1.58; αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται Id.4.118
; τί ἐστιν; what is it? what's the matter? Ar.Th. 193; τί οὖν ἦν τοῦτο; how came it to pass? Pl.Phd. 58a: repeated with a relat. to avoid a positive assertion, ἔστι δ' ὅπῃ νῦν ἔ. things are as they are, i.e. are ill, A.Ag.67.

III be the fact or the case, διπλασίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι ἤ ἐστιν twice as large as it really is, Th.1.10; αὐτὸ ὅ ἐστι καλόν beauty in its essence, Pl.Smp. 211c, cf. Phd. 74b; freq. in part., τὸν ἐόντα λόγον λέγειν or φαίνειν the true story, Hdt.1.95, 116; τῷ ἐόντι χρήσασθαι tell the truth, ib. 30; τὰ ὄντα ἀπαγγέλλειν Th.7.8
; σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν, λόγον οὐκ ὄντα, S.El. 584, Ar.Ra. 1052; τῷ ὄντι in reality, in fact, Pl.Prt. 328d, etc.; to apply a quotation to a case in point, τῷ ὄντι κλαυσίγελως real 'smiles through tears' (with allusion to Il.6.484), X.HG7.2.9, cf. Pl. La. 196d; κατὰ τὸ ἐόν according to the fact, rightly, Hdt.1.97; πᾶν τὸ ἐόν the whole truth, Id.9.11; τοῦ ἐόντος ἀποτεύξεται Hp.VM 2
.

IV folld. by the relat., οὐκ ἔστιν ὅς or ὅστις no one, οὐκ ἔσθ' ὃς.. ἀπαλάλκοι Il.22.348
; οὐκ ἔ. οὐδεὶς ὅς E.El. 903
; οὐκ ἔ. ὅτῳ, = οὐδενί, A.Pr. 293 (anap.), cf. 989: freq. in pl., εἰσὶν οἵ, = Lat. sunt qui, used exactly like ἔνιοι, Th.6.88, 7.44, Pl.Men. 77d, Grg. 503a, etc. ( εἰσί τινες οἵ .. Th.3.24); ἐστὶν ἃ χωρία, πολίσματα, Id.1.12,65; ἐστὶν ἃ εἰπεῖν Id.2.67
; ἦσαν οἵ X.An.5.2.14
; the sg. Verb is used even with masc. and fem. pl., ἐστὶν οἵ, αἵ, Hp.Fract.1, VC4, X.Cyr.2.3.16; more freq. in oblique cases, ποταμῶν ἐστὶ ὧν Hdt.7.187
; ἐστὶν ἀφ' ὧν Th.8.65
; ἐστὶ παρ' οἷς, ἐστὶν ἐν οἷς, Id.1.23, 5.25: in questions ὅστις is used, ἔστιν ἥντινα δόξαν.. ἀπεκρίνατο; Pl.Men. 85b: with relat. Particles, ἐστὶν ἔνθα, = Lat. est ubi, X.Cyr.7.4.15, etc.; ἐ. ὅπῃ, ἔσθ' ὅπου, somehow, somewhere, Pl.Prt. 331d, A.Eu. 517, S.OT 448, etc.; in questions expecting a neg. answer, ἐ. ὁπόθεν, ὅπως; Pl.Phlb. 35a, R. 493e, etc.; οὐ γάρ ἐσθ' ὅπως Pi.Fr.61
, cf. Hdt.7.102, A.Ag. 620; οὐκ ἔ. ὅπως οὐ in any case, necessarily, Ar. Pax 188; οὐκ ἔ. ὡς Pl. Men. 76e
, etc.; ἐ. ὅτε, ἔσθ' ὅτε, sometimes, Pi.Fr.180.2, S.Aj.56, Th. 7.21, etc.

V ἦν is sts. used with pl. masc. and fem., usu. at the beginning of a sentence, there was, τῆς δ' ἦν τρεῖς κεφαλαί Hes.Th. 321
; (but in ἦν δ' ἐρῳδιοί τε πολλοί Epich.46
, cf. 59, al., it may be taken as [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl.); ἦν δ' ἀμφίπλεκτοι κλίμακες S.Tr. 520
(lyr.); ἦν ἄρα κἀκεῖνοι ταλακάρδιοι Epigr. ap. Aeschin.3.184; less freq. ἔστι, ἔστι δὲ μεταξὺ.. ἑπτὰ στάδιοι Hdt.1.26
, cf. 7.34; ἔστι.. ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος Pl.R. 463a
; before dual Nouns, Ar.V.58, Pl.Grg. 500d.

VI ἔστι impers., c. inf., it is possible, ἔστι γὰρ ἀμφοτέροισιν ὀνείδεα μυθήσασθαι Il.20.246
; ἔστι μὲν εὕδειν, ἔστι δὲ τερπομένοισιν ἀκούειν Od. 15.392
; εἴ τί πού ἐστι (sc. πιθέσθαι) 4.193; τοιάδε.. ἐστὶν ἀκοῦσαι A. Pr. 1055
(anap.); ἔστι τεκμήρια ὁρᾶν X.An.3.2.13
, cf. Ar.Ra. 1163, Aeschin.3.105, D.18.272, Arist.Ath.53.6, etc.; so in imper., opt., and subj., ἔστω ἀποφέρεσθαι τῷ βουλομένῳ IG12.10.7
; μυρία ἂν εἴη λέγειν Pl.Plt. 271e
; ὅπως ἂν ᾖ δρᾶν IG2.1054.91
: more freq. in neg. clauses, Il.6.267, etc.; folld. by ὥστε c. inf., S.Ph. 656: c. acc. et inf., ἁδόντα δ' εἴη με τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ὁμιλεῖν Pi.P.2.96
; ἔστιν ἐκπεσεῖν ἀρχῆς Δία A.Pr. 757
: sts. not impers. in this sense, θάλασσα δ' οὐκέτ' ἦν ἰδεῖν Id.Pers. 419
.

b ἔστω in argument, let it be granted, ἔστω τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἶναι D.H.Comp.25
; ἔστω σοι τοῦθ' οὕτως Plu.2.987b
; ἔστω εἶναί τινα τοιοῦτον D.
Chr.74.24.

B most freq., to be, the Copula connecting the predicate with the Subject, both being in the same case: hence, signify, import, τὸ γὰρ εἴρειν λέγειν ἐστίν Pl.Cra. 398d
; esp. in the phrase τοῦτ' ἔστι, hoc est; Σκαιόλαν, ὅπερ ἐστὶ Λαϊόν Plu.Publ.17
: with numerals, τὰ δὶς πέντε δέκα ἐστίν twice five are ten, X.Mem.4.4.7; εἶναί τις or τι, to be somebody, something, be of some consequence, v. τις; οὐδὲν εἶναι Pl.R. 562d, etc.

2 periphr. with the Participle to represent the finite Verb: with [tense] pf. part. once in Hom., τετληότες εἰμέν, for τετλήκαμεν, Il.5.873; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦν τεθνηκώς, for ἐτεθνήκει, A. Ag. 869; ἔσται δεδορκώς ib. 1179; εἰμὶ γεγώς S.Aj. 1299
; πεφυκός ἐστι Ar.Av. 1473
; δεδρακότες εἰσίν Th.3.68
; κατακεκονότες ἔσεσθε X.An.7.6.36
: with [tense] aor. part., once in Hom., βλήμενος ἦν Il.4.211
; so προδείσας εἰμί, οὐ σιωπήσας ἔσει; S.OT90, 1146, cf. A.Supp. 460: with [tense] pres. part., ἦν προκείμενον Id.Pers. 371
; φεύγων Ὀρέστης ἐστίν Id.Ch. 136
; εἴην οὐκ ἂν εὖ φρονῶν S.Aj. 1330
; τί δ' ἐστί.. φέρον; Id.OT 991, cf. 274, 708; λέγων ἐστίν τις E.Hec. 1179
; ἦν τίς σ' ὑβρίζων Id.HF 313
; πόρρω ἤδη εἶ πορευόμενος Pl.Ly. 204b
; βαδίζων εἰμί Ar.Ra. 36
; freq. in Hdt., ἦσαν ἱέντες 1.57
, al.; even εἰσὶ διάφοροι ἐόντες 3.49
(s.v.l.):— if the Art. is joined with the Part., the noun is made emphatic, Κᾶρές εἰσι οἱ καταδέξαντες the persons who showed her were Carians, Id.1.171; αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ μαρτυρῶν A.Eu. 798
; δόλος ἦν ὁ φράσας S.El. 197
(anap.).

C εἶναι is freq. modified in sense by the addition of Advbs., or the cases of Nouns without or with Preps.:

I εἶναι with Advbs., where the Adv. often merely represents a Noun and stands as the predicate, ἅλις δέ οἱ ἦσαν ἄρουραι Il.14.122
, etc.; ἀκέων, ἀκήν εἶναι, to be silent, 4.22, Od.2.82; σῖγα πᾶς ἔστω λεώς E.Hec. 532
; διαγνῶναι χαλεπῶς ἦν ἄνδρα ἕκαστον Il.7.424
; ἀσφαλέως ἡ κομιδὴ ἔσται will go on safely, Hdt.4.134; ἐγγύς, πόρρω εἶναι, Th.6.88, Pl.Prt. 356e: freq. impers. with words implying good or ill fortune, Κουρήτεσσι κακῶς ἦν it fared ill with them, Il.9.551; εὖ γὰρ ἔσται E.Med.89
, cf. Ar.Pl. 1188, etc.; ἡδέως ἂν αὐτοῖς εἴη D.59.30
.

II c. gen., to express descent or extraction, πατρὸς δ' εἴμ' ἀγαθοῖο Il.21.109
; αἵματός εἰς ἀγαθοῖο Od. 4.611
, cf. Hdt.3.71, Th.2.71, etc.; πόλεως μεγίστης εἶ X.An.7.3.19
.

b to express the material of which a thing is made, ἡ κρηπίς ἐστι λίθων μεγάλων consists of.., Hdt.1.93; τῆς πόλιος ἐούσης δύο φαρσέων ib. 186; τοιούτων ἔργων ἐστὶ ἡ τυραννίς is made up of.., Id.5.92.ή, etc.

c to express the class to which a person or thing belongs, εἶ γὰρ τῶν φίλων you are one of them, Ar.Pl. 345; ἐτύγχανε βουλῆς ὤν Th.3.70
; ὅσοι ἦσαν τῶν προτέρων στρατιωτῶν Id.7.44
; Κριτίας τῶν τριάκοντα ὤν X.Mem.1.2.31
; ἔστι τῶν αἰσχρῶν it is in the class of disgraceful things, i. e. it is disgraceful, D.2.2.

d to express that a thing belongs to another, Τροίαν Ἀχαιῶν οὖσαν A.Ag. 269
; τὸ πεδίον ἦν μέν κοτε Χορασμίων Hdt.3.117
, etc.: hence, to be of the party of, ἦσαν.. τινὲς μὲν φιλίππου, τινὲς δὲ τοῦ βελτίστου D.9.56
, cf. 37.53; to be de pendent upon, S.Ant. 737, etc.; to be at the mercy of, ἔστι τοῦ λέγοντος, ἢν φόβους λέγῃ Id.OT 917
.

e to express one's duty, business, custom, nature, and the like , οὔτοι γυναικός ἐστι 'tis not a woman's part, A.Ag. 940; τὸ ἐπιτιμᾶν παντὸς εἶναι D.1.16
; τὸ δὲ ναυτικὸν τέχνης ἐστίν is matter of art, requires art, Th.1.142, cf.83.

f in LXX, to be occupied about, ἦσαν τοῦ θύειν 2 Ch.30.17
; ἔσεσθαι, c. gen., to be about to, ἐσόμεθα τοῦ σῶσαί σε 2 Ki.10.11
.

III with the dat., ἐστί μοι I have, freq. in Hom., etc.

2 with two dats., σφίσι τε καὶ Ἀθηναίοισι εἶναι οὐδὲν πρῆγμα that they and the Athenians have nothing to do one with another, Hdt.5.84; μηδὲν εἶναι σοὶ καὶ φιλίππῳ πρᾶγμα D.18.283
; more shortly, σοί τε καὶ τούτοισι πρήγμασι τί ἐστι; Hdt.5.33; τί τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τῇ βασάνῳ; D.29.36; τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; Lat. quid tecum est mihi? Ev.Marc.5.7, etc.; also ἐμοὶ οὐδὲν πρὸς τοὺς τοιούτους (sc. ἐστίν) Isoc.4.12; ἐν οἷς πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους ἐστὶ τῷ δήμῳ D.18.278
; ἔσται αὐτῳ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, in tomb inscriptions, JHS18.113, etc.

3 with ἄσμενος, βουλόμενος, etc., added, ἐμοὶ δέ κεν ἀσμένῳ εἴη 'twould be to my delight, Il.14.108; οὐκ ἂν σφίσι βουλομένοις εἶναι Th.7.35
; προσδεχομένῳ Id.6.46
; θέλοντι S.OT 1356
(lyr.); ἡδομένοις Pl.La. 187c
.

IV with Preps., εἶναι ἀπό τινος, = εἶναί τινος (supr. 11.a), X.Mem.1.6.9; εἰσὶν ἀπ' ἐναντίων αὗται πραγμάτων Pl.Phlb. 12d
; but εἶναι ἀπ' οἴκου to be away from.., Th.1.99.

2 εἶναι ἔκ τινος to be sprung from, εἴμ' ἐκ Παιονίης, Μυρμιδόνων ἔξ εἰμι, Il.21.154, 24.397, etc.; ἔστιν ἐξ ἀνάγκης it is of necessity, i. e. necessary, Pl.Sph. 256d.

3 εἶναι ἐν .. to be in a certain state, ἐν εὐπαθείῃσι Hdt.1.22
; ἐν ἀθυμία, etc., Th.6.46, etc.; ἐν ταραχαῖς D.18.218
; εἶναι ἐν ἀξιώματι to be in esteem, Th.1.130; οἱ ἐν τέλεϊ ἐόντες those in office, Hdt.3.18, etc.; but εἶναι ἐν τέχνῃ, ἐν φιλοσοφία to be engaged in.., S.OT 562, Pl.Phd. 59a.

b ἐν σοί ἐστι it depends on thee, Hdt.6.109, S.Ph. 963; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Id.OT 314
; so also ἐπί τινι Id.Ph. 1003
, X.Cyr.1.6.2, etc.

4 εἶναι διά .., much like εἶναι ἐν .., εἶναι διὰ φόβου, = φοβεῖσθαι, Th.6.34; εἶναι δι' ὄχλου, = ὀχληρὸν εἶναι, Id.1.73; εἶναι διὰ μόχθων X.Cyr.1.6.25
; εἶναι δι' αἰτίας, = αἰτιᾶσθαι, D.H.1.70; Geom., pass through, διὰ τᾶς ἑτέρας διαμέτρου ἐόντος τοῦ ἐπιπέδου Archim.Con.Sph.20
.

5 εἶναι ἐφ' ἑαυτῆς to be by oneself, D.25.23; εἶναι ἐπὶ ὀνόματος to bear a name, Id.39.21; εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς πράγμασιν to be engaged in.., Id.2.12; εἶναι ἐπί τινα to be against him, Id.6.33; εἶναι ἐφ' ἑξήκοντα στάδια to reach sixty stadia, X.An.4.6.11; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὰς ἁφάς pass through the points of contact, Apollon. Perg.Con.4.1; εἶναι ἐπί τινι, v. supr. 3 b.

6 εἶναι πρός τινος to be in one's favour, Th.4.10,29, etc.; to suit, X.An. 1.2.11, etc.; εἶναι πρός τινι engaged in, Pl.Phd. 84c, Philostr.VA5.31; πρὸς τοῖς ἰδίοις mind one's own affairs, Arist.Pol. 1309a6, Ath.16.3; εἶναι πρὸς τὸ κωλύειν Plb.1.26.3
; πρὸς τὸ πονεῖν Telesp.46 H.; εἶναι περί τι X.An.3.5.7
, etc.

7 εἶναι παρά τινι or τινα, = παρειναι, Id.Cyr.6.2.15, Hdt.8.140.ά (s.v.l.).

8 εἶναι ὑπό τινα or τινι to be subject to.., X.HG5.2.17 (s.v.l.), 6.2.4.

9 περὶ τούτων ἐστίν that is the question, Men.Epit.30.

10 εἶναι ἀπό .., in Geom., to be constructed upon, Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.9, Con.Sph.7.

D ἐστί is very freq. omitted, mostly in the [tense] pres. ind. before certain predicates, as ἀνάγκη, ἄξιον, δυνατόν, εἰκός, ἕτοιμον, οἷόν τε, ῥᾴδιον, χρεών, etc., and after the neut. of Verbals in - τέος, and such forms as θαυμαστὸν ὅσον: less freq. with other persons and moods, εἰμί omitted, S.OT92, Aj. 813; εἶ, Od.4.206; ἐσμέν, S.Ant. 634; ἐστέ, Od.10.463; εἰσί, S.OT 499 (lyr.), IG2.778 B; subj. ᾖ, Il.14.376, E.Hipp. 659, Antipho 5.32; opt. εἴη, IG22.1183.12; [tense] impf. ἦν, ib.2.778 B; [tense] fut. ἔσονται, Od.14.394.

E the Inf. freq. seems redundant,

1 in phrases implying power or will to do a thing, ἑκὼν εἶναι (v. ἑκών) κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι Is.2.32
; εἰς δύναμιν εἶναι Pl.Plt. 300c
; τὸ ἐπ' ἐκείνοις εἶναι, quantum in illis esset, Th.8.48, X.HG3.5.9, cf. Lys.13.58; τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28
; τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι X.An.1.6.9
; κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι Pl.Prt. 317a
; τὸ τήμερον, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, Id.Cra. 396e, La. 201c, Theopomp. Com.98, Decr. ap. Arist.Ath.31.2, etc.

2 after Verbs of naming or choosing, σοφιστὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι Pl.Prt. 311e
; σύμμαχόν μιν εἵλοντο εἶναι Hdt.8.134
; of giving, δῶκε ξεινήϊον εἶναι Il. 11.20
.

F [tense] impf. ἦνissts. used where other languages take the [tense] pres.,

1 after ἄρα, to express a fact which is and has always been the same, δέρμα δὲ ἀνθρώπου.. ἦν ἄρα σχεδὸν δερμάτων πάντων λαμπρότατον human skin then it appears is.., Hdt.4.64; Κύπρις οὐκ ἄρ' ἦν θεός E. Hipp. 359
; ὡς ἄρ' ἦσθ' ἐμὸς πατὴρ ὀρθῶς ib. 1169; ἦ πολύμοχθον ἄρ' ἦν γένος.. ἁμερίων Id.IA 1330
; ἦ στωμύλος ἦσθα Theoc.5.79
; so also when there is reference to a past thought, τουτὶ τί ἦν; what is this? Ar.Ach. 157, cf. Pl.Cra. 387c: so in the Aristotelian formula τὸ τί ἦν εἶναι (APo.82b38, al.), used to express the essential nature of a thing, where τί ἦν (for ἐστί) takes the place of the dat. in such phrases as τὸ ἀγαθῷ εἶναι, τὸ μεγέθει εἶναι, APr.67b12, de An.429b10.

G ἐγώ εἰμι, in LXX, pleonastic for ἐγώ, ἐγώ εἰμι οὐχ ἥμαρτον Jd. 11.27
, cf. 6.18; also ἔσται πᾶς ἀποκτενεῖ με Ge.4.14
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰμί
33 λογισμός

λογ-ισμός, ὁ,

A counting, calculation, τῶν ἡμερῶν Th.4.122
; τυγχάνειν τοῦ ἀληθοῦς λ. Id.3.20
; ἐκ τοιοῦδε λ. ἔξεστί τῳ σκοπεῖν Id.5.68
; ἐν λ. ἁμαρτάνειν Pl.R. 340d
; ἀριθμὸς καὶ λ. Id.Phdr. 274c
; ἐπὶ λογισμὸν ἐλθόντες Id.Euthphr.7b
; καθέζεσθαι ἐπὶ τοὺς λ. Aeschin.3.59
: in pl., numbers, arithmetic, λογισμοὺς μανθάνειν X.Mem.4.7.8
; λογισμούς τε καὶ ἀστρονομίαν καὶ γεωμετρίαν.. διδάσκειν Pl.Prt. 318e
, cf. R. 510c, al.

2 account, reckoning, Lys.32.19, D.18.113, etc.; λ. λαμβάνειν hold an audit, Arist.Pol. 1322b9.

II without reference to number, calculation, reasoning, τοῦ ξυμφέροντος λογισμῷ Th.2.40
; καθιστάναι τινὰς ἐς λ. Id.6.34
; λογισμῷ ἐλάχιστα χρώμενοι Id.2.11
; ἐνδέχεταί τι λογισμόν Id.4.92
; λ. αὐτοκράτορι (v. αὐτοκράτωρ 1.4
) ib. 108; οὐ λογισμῷ δόντες τοὺς κινδύνους Lys.2.23
; λογισμὸν περί τινος ἔχειν Pl. Lg. 805a
; ὅσον ἦν ἀνθρωπίνῳ λ. δυνατόν D.18.300
, cf. 193; τοῖς λ. τοῖς ἰδίοις πταίων ἀεί Men.380
; μετὰ λογισμοῦ πάντα πράττουσίν τινος Id.617
, cf. Philem.90.10, etc.; personified, opp. Θυμός, Cleanth.Stoic. 1.129.

2 reason, argument, X.HG3.4.27, Pl.Ti. 34a.

III reasoning power, [Epich.] 257.1, Democr. 187, X.Mem.4.3.11, Epicur. Sent.16, al.: freq. in Arist., τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένος [ζῇ] καὶ τέχνῃ καὶ λογισμοῖς Metaph. 980b28
, cf. de An. 415a8, al.—Only in Prose and Com.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λογισμός
34 μονοπρόσωπος

μονο-πρόσωπος, ον,

A with one face, Artem.2.37; adorned with one face, σκάφιον IG11(4).1308
(Delos, ii B.C.).

2 with only one front decorated, PSI5.547.29 (iii B.C.).

II with one person or character, μ. ποίησις monologue, D.L.9.112: Gramm., μ. ἀντωνυμία a pronoun having reference to one person, opp. a possessive pronoun, Draco ap.A.D.Pron.17.2; but also, a pronoun having one person, e.g. ἐκεῖνος (opp. ἵ, which has corresponding first and second persons), Hdn.Gr.1.474, Sch.D.T.p.82 H. Adv. - πως in monologue form, Tz.ad Lyc.p.4 S., Proll.Hes.p.11 G.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μονοπρόσωπος
35 ξενοπρόσωπος

ξενο-πρόσωπος, ον, only in Adv. -πως,

A with reference to a person other than oneself, Sch.Aristid. p.430 D.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ξενοπρόσωπος
36 οὐ

οὐ, the negative of

A fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compds. of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, v. infr. G.

A USAGE.

I as the negative of single words,

II as the negative of the sentence.

I οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compd. with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, Il.24.296; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, 2.132, 4.55, al.; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, 1.112, 3.289, al.; οὔ φημι deny, 7.393, 23.668, al. (In most of these uses μή can replace οὐ when the constr. requires it, e.g. εἰ μή φησι ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι Lycurg.34
; but sts. οὐ is retained, εἰ δ' ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν Il.3.289
; εἰ δέ κ'.. ου'κ εἰῶσι 20.139
; ἐὰν οὐ φάσκῃ Lys.13.76
; ἐάντε.. οὐ (v.l. μή) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε Pl. Ap. 25b
):—with Participles: οὐκ ἐθέλων Il.4.224
, 300, 6.165, etc.:— with Adjectives: οὐκ ἀέκοντε 5.366
, 768, al.; οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7
, etc.:— with Adverbs: οὐχ ἥκιστα Id.1.68
, etc.: rarely with Verbal Nouns (v. infr. 11.10).—On the use of οὐ in contrasts, v. infr. B.

II as negativing the whole sentence,

1 οὐ is freq. used alone, sts. with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (sc. ἀποκερῇ) , ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ Pl.Phd. 89b
: sts. as negativing the preceding sentence, Ar. Pax 850, X.HG1.7.19: as a Particle of solemn denial freq. with μά (q. v.) and the acc.; sts. without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον S. OT 660
(lyr.), cf. 1088 (lyr.), El. 1063 (lyr.), Ant. 758.

2 with ind. of statement, τὴν δ' ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω Il.1.29
, cf. 114, 495; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά Pi.P.1.94
; ἔνθα κεν οὔ τιν' ἀδάκρυτόν γ' ἐνόησας Ἀργείων Od.24.61
; οὔ κεν.. ἔπαξε Pi.N.7.25
; οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε Il.8.369
.

3 with subj. in [tense] fut. sense, only in [dialect] Ep., οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται 7.197
; οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίς μῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, cf. 11.387.

4 with opt. in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also [dialect] Ep., ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
, 20.286.

5 with opt. and ἄν, κείνοισι δ' ἂν οὔ τις.. μαχέοιτο 1.271
, cf. 301, 2.250, Hdt. 6.63, A.Pr. 979, S.Aj. 155 (anap.), E.IA 310, Ar.Ach. 403, etc.

6 in dependent clauses οὐ is used,

a with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω.. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι Od.4.377
, cf. S.El. 561, D.2.8, etc.: so with ind. or opt. and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν X.HG5.4.22
, cf. Pl.R. 330a; ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως αὐτοὺς δέχοισθε μαθεῖν χρή Th.1.40
, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.3, etc.: with opt. representing ind. in orat. obliq., ἔλεξε παιδὶ σῷ.. ὡς.. Ἕλληνες οὐ μενοῖεν A.Pers. 358
, cf. S.Ph. 346, Th.1.38, X.HG6.1.1, Pl.Ap. 22b, etc.: for μή in such sentences, v. μή B. 3.

b in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια.. ῥέξε Il.9.534
; ἄχθεται ὅτι οὐ κάρτα θεραπεύεται Hdt.3.80
; διότι οὐκ ἦσαν δίκαι, οὐ δυνατοὶ ἦμεν παρ' αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον πράξασθαι Lys.17.3
; μή με κτεῖν', ἐπεὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός εἰμι Il.21.95
, etc.; νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις.., εἶμι Pl.Prt. 335c
; ἐπειδὴ τὸ χωρίον οὐχ ἡλίσκετο Th.1.102
; νηπιάχοις οἷς οὔ τι μέλει πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il.2.338
, etc.: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν Pl.Cri. 46a
; esp. in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ .., as οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051
, cf. Hec. 298; οὔτις ἔσθ' ὃς οὔ S.Aj. 725
; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ .. Isoc. 15.180.

c after ὥστε with ind. or opt. with ἄν, ὥστ' οὐ δυνατόν σ' εἵργειν ἔσται Ar.V. 384
, cf. S.Aj.98, OT 411; οὕτως αὐτοὺς ἀγαπῶμεν.. ὥστε.. οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσαιμεν Isoc.8.45
; οὐκ ἂν ὡρκίζομεν αὐτὸν ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης ἂν διημαρτήκει καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀμφότερ' εἶχε D.18.30
: ὥστε οὐ with inf. is almost invariably due to orat. obliq., ὥστ' οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) Id.19.308, cf. Th.5.40, 8.76, Lys.18.6, Is.11.27 (cj. Reiske).—Rarely not in orat. obliq., S.El. 780, E. Ph. 1358, Hel. 108, D.53.2,9.48.

7 in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except,

a in Hom., when the εἰ clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indic., εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ' ἐπιπείσεται Il. 15.162
, cf. 178, 20.129, 24.296, Od.2.274, Il.4.160, Od.12.382, 13.144 (9.410 is an exception).

b when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι Isoc.1.44
; κατοικτῖραι.., εἰ.. οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται Hdt.7.46
, cf. S.Aj. 1242; so also δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους ἔχομεν, Ἕλληνας δὲ οὐ τιμωρησόμεθα Hdt.7.9
, cf. And.1.102, Lys.20.8 (prob.), D.8.55;
οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ τὸ μὲν Ἀργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχήν, ὑμεῖς δ' ὄντες Ἀθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον.. φοβήσεσθε
; Id.15.23
, cf. Hdt.5.97, Lys.22.13.

c when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (v. A. I), or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο D.54.29
codd.; εἰ δ' οὐκέτ' ἐστί (sc. ὥσπερ λέγεις)
, τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη
; E. Ion 347
.

8 οὐ is used with inf. in orat. obliq., when it represents the ind. of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι Od.4.664
, cf. Il.17.174, 21.316, S.Ph. 1389, etc.; λέγοντες οὐκ εἶναι αὐτόνομοι Th.1.67
, cf. Pl.R. 348c, X.Cyr.1.6.18; οἶμαι.. οὐκ ὀλίγον ἔργον αὐτὸ εἶναι Pl.R. 369b
, cf. S.OT 1051, Th.1.71, etc.; ἡγήσαντο ἡμᾶς οὐ περιόψεσθαι ib.39. (For the occasional use of μή, v. μή B. 5c; sts. we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ' ἐπιθύνειν χερί S.Ph. 1058s
q.; αὐτὸ ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ.. παρασκευαστόν Pl.Prt. 319b
.)

9 οὐ is used with the part., when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ' ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον E.Hec. 316
; κατενόησαν οὐ πολλοὺς τοὺς Θηβαίους ὄντας Th.2
. 3; ἔργῳ δηλώσω οὐ παραγενόμενος Antipho2.4.8
, etc.; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι Hdt.8.89
; τὴν Μένδην πόλιν ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἀνοιχθεῖσαν διήρπασαν Th.4.130
; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν E.Alc. 352
, cf. S.Ph. 377, etc.: regularly with ὡς and part., ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε Id.El. 1025
, etc.; ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιήσοντες ταῦτα Lys.12.73
, cf. S.Ph. 884, Aj. 682, Hdt.7.99, Th.1.2,5,28,68,90; ὥσπερ οὐ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τεκμηρίῳ χρωμένους Lycurg.90
, cf. Th.8.1, Isoc.4.11:—for exceptions, v. μή B. 6.

b when the part. is used with the Art., μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι Th.1.74
; τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν εἰδότας Id.4.111
; οἱ οὐκ ἐθέλοντες Antipho 6.26
; τῶν οὐ βουλομένων And.1.9
; τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν Lys.12.82
, cf. τὸν οὐδὲ συμπενθῆσαι τὰς τῆς πατρίδος συμφορὰς τολμήσαντα (preceded by τὸν.. μήτε ὅπλα θέμενον ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος μήτε τὸ σῶμα παρασχόντα κτλ.) Lycurg.43; τὸ οὐχ εὑρημένον Pl.R. 427e
.

10 Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (v. μή B. 7
) but οὐ is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις X.Lac.5.4
; τοὺς οὐδένας E.IA 371
; τὸν οὐδέν Id.Ph. 598
(whereas ὁ μηδείς, τὸ μηδέν is the rule); τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, Th.1.137; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις Id.3.95
; ἡ τῶν χωρίων οὐκ ἀπόδοσις Id.5.35
, cf.E. Hipp. 196 (anap.); so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ Id.Ba. 1287
; οὐ πάλης ὕπο ib. 455.

11 for οὐ μή, v. sub voc.

12 in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι ..; Il.10.165; οὐχ ὁράᾳς ..; dost thou not see? Od.17.545;
οὐκ.. ᾐσθόμην
; A.Pr. 956
: so as a strong form of imper.,
οὐκ ἀπαλλάξει
; E. Ion 524
;
οὐκ ἀποκτενεῖτε τὸν μιαρὸν τοῦτον ἄνθρωπον
; Din.1.18
;
οὐκ εἶ καταπιὼν Εὐριπίδην
; Ar.Ach. 484
; βάλλε, βάλλε folld. by οὐ βαλεῖς; οὐ βαλεῖς; ib. 281 and 283, cf. S.Ant. 885: also with opt. and ἄν, οὐκ ἂν δὴ τόνδ' ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο ( = ἔρυσαι) ; Il.5.456; οὐκ ἂν φράσειας ( = φράσον) ; S.Ph. 1222; but in questions introduced by οὐ δή, οὐ δή του, οὔ που, οὔ τί που, a doubt is implied of the statement involved, and an appeal is made to the hearers, οὐ δή ποθ' ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely you are not..? Id.El. 1202, cf. Ph. 900; οὔ τί που οὗτος Ἀπόλλων ..; Pi.P.4.87, cf. S.Ph. 1233, E.IA 670, Hel. 135, Ion 1113, Ar.Ra. 522, 526.

B POSITION. οὐ is generally put immediately before the word which it negatives, οὐκ ἐκεῖνον ἐθεώμην.—ἀλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης X.Cyr.3.1.41
; οὐχ αἱ τρίχες ποιοῦσιν αἱ λευκαὶ φρονεῖν Men.639
; οὐ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀκοντίζειν οὐκ ἔβαλον αὐτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδενὶ ὑπὸ τὸ ἀκόντιον ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.6
: in Poetry the position is freq. more free, κίνδυνος ἄναλκιν οὐ φῶτα λαμβάνει Pi.O.1.81
; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον ib. 4.19; κατακρύπτει δ' οὐ κόνις ib.8.79; χρὴ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Id.P. 2.88
: sts. emphatically at the end of the clause, καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ Id.O.7.48
; ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ S.Aj. 545
: in clauses opposed by μέν and δέ the οὐ (or μή) is freq. placed at the end, βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ' οὔ Th.6.38
; οὗτος δ' ἦν καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ' οὔ X.An.4.4.3
; ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ δοκεῖν μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς.., εἶναι δ' οὔ Pl.Ap. 21c
; so τὸ Πέρσας μὲν λέληθε, ἡμέας μέντοι οὔ Hdt.1.139
: freq. with ὁ μὲν.. ὁ δέ, οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μέν, τὰς δ' οὔ Pl.Cri. 47a
, cf. Ap. 24e, R. 475b, etc.; Λέριοι κακοί, οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ Phoc.1
: sts. in the first clause after μέν, οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ ἐξῆγον μὲν οὔ, συνεκάλεσαν δέ X.An.6.4.20
, cf. 4.8.2, Cyr.1.4.10, Pl.Phd. 73b; κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὒ τὸ στρατόπεδον Hdt.7.208
.

C ACCUMULATION. A simple neg. (οὐ or μή) is freq. repeated in composition with Prons., Advbs., or Conjs., as οὐδείς or μηδείς, οὐδέ or μηδέ, οὐδαμῶς or μηδαμῶς, first in Hom., οὔ μιν ὁΐομαιοὐδὲ πεπύσθαι λυγρῆς ἀγγελίης Il.17.641
; ἀλλ' οὔ μοι Τρώων τόσσον μέλει ἄλγος ὀπίσσω οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος 6.450
; οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον οἰκείου φίλου E.Andr. 986
: the first neg. may be a compd., καθεύδων οὐδεὶς οὐδενὸς ἄξιος οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τοῦ μὴ ζῶντος Pl. Lg. 808b
; οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Id.Prm. 166a
(similarly with μή, Phdr. 236e): or a neg. Adj., ἀδύνατος οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν λέγειν μάτην E.Andr. 746
; οὐ follows the compd. neg., οὐδ' εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ' ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους X. Cyr.2.1.8
; οὐδ' ἂν ἡ πόλις ἄρα ([etym.] ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν ) ὅλη τοιοῦτον ποιῇ, οὐκ ἐπαινέσῃ Pl.R. 426b
, cf. Smp. 204a: sts. a confirmative Particle accompanies the first οὐ or οὐδέ, and the neg. is repeated with emphasis, οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδέ μ' ἔασκες Il.19.295
; οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱὸς.. δὴν ἧν 6.130
, v. οὐδέ C. 11; οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ αὖ ὡς σύ μοι δοκεῖς οἴεσθαι Pl.Prt. 332a
: so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. without any such Particle, οὐ σμικρός, οὔχ, ἁγὼν ὅδε not small, no, is this struggle, S.OC 587; θεοῖς τέθνηκεν οὗτος, οὐ κείνοισιν, οὔ Id.Aj. 970
, cf.Ar.Ra.28, 1308, X.Smp. 2.4, Pl.R. 390c.

2 when the compd. neg. precedes and the simple neg. follows with the Verb, the opposing negs. produce an emphatic positive, οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει Orac. ap. Hdt.5.56; γλώσσης κρυφαῖον οὐδὲν οὐ διέρχεται S.Fr. 935
(but prob. f.l.); οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι X.Smp.1.9
.

3 similarly each of two simple negs. may retain its negating force, ὥσπερ οὐ διὰ πρᾳότητα καὶ ἀσχολίαν τὴν ὑμετέραν οὐ δεδωκὼς ὑμῖν δίκην Lys.6.34
; ἐγὼ δ' οὐκ οἶμαι.. οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι Id.13.52
(similarly with μή, D.19.77): sts. a combination of a μέν- clause with a δέ- clause containing οὐ is negatived as a whole by a preceding οὐ, e.g. οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν δι' ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο Id.18.13
.

D PLEONASM OF οὐ: after Verbs of denying, doubting, and disputing, folld. by ὡς or ὅτι with a finite Verb, οὐ is inserted to show the neg. character of the statement, where in Engl. the neg. is not required, ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῆ ταῦτ' ἐστὶν οὐκ ἔχετ' ἀντιλέγειν D.8.31
, cf. Th.1.77, X.HG2.3.16, Smp.2.12, Isoc.5.57, etc.; οὐδεὶς ἂν τολμήσειεν ἀντειπεῖν ὡς οὐ τὴν μὲν ἐμπειρίαν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἔχομεν Id.6.48
, cf. And.4.34, D.16.4, etc.; οὐκ ἂν ἀρνηθεῖεν ἔνιοι ὡς οὐκ εἰσὶ τοιοῦτοι Id.9.54
; ἀρνεῖσθαι ὅτι οὐ παρῆν X.Ath.2.17
; οὐδ' αὐτὸς ὁ Λάμπις ἔξαρνος ἐγένετο ὡς οὐκ εἴη εἰρηκὼς κτλ. D.34.49; ἀμφισβητεῖν ὡς οὐχὶ.. δοτέον δίκην Pl.Euthphr.8c
, cf. R. 476d, Prm. 135a; ἀπιστεῖν ὅτι οὐ .. Id.Men. 89d; ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαί τισιν ὡς οὐκ ἔσται μεταγνῶναι Th. 3.46
: οὐ is sts. thus used in the second member of a negative comparative sentence, ἥκει ὁ Πέρσης οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ' ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ' ὑμέας Hdt.4.118
, cf. 5.94, 7.16.γ, Th.2.62,3.36: after πλήν, X.Lac. 15.6, D.18.45.

E OMISSION OF οὐ: οὐ is sts. omitted, esp. by Poets, when it may be supplied from the next clause, γῆ δ' οὐδ' ἀὴρ οὐδ' οὐρανὸς ἦν Ar.Av. 694
; σιδήρῳ οὐδ' ἀργύρῳ χρέωνται οὐδέν Hdt.1.215
; ῥοδιακὴ οὖς οὐδὲ πυθμένα οὐκ ἔχουσα Inscr.Délos 313a84
(iii B. C.).

F in Poetry, if ἤ stands before οὐ, the two sounds coalesce into one syllable, as in ἦ οὐχ Il.5.349
, cf. Od.1.298; so, in [dialect] Att., μὴ οὐ S. OT 283
, etc., and ἐγὼ οὔτε ib. 332, ἐγὼ οὐ Ar.Eq. 340
.—This synizesis is general in [dialect] Ep., universal in [dialect] Att.

G FORM. οὐ is used before consonants (including the digamma, e.g. before ἕθεν, οἱ, e(, Il.1.114, 2.392, 24.214, but not before ὅς Possess., οὐχ ᾧ πατρί Od.13.265
, cf. οὐκ ἐπέεσσι Il.15.162
, etc.); οὐκ before vowels with spir. lenis, οὐχ before vowels with spir. asper; in our text of Hdt. οὐκ is used before all vowels (prob. because Hdt. had no spir. asper): the [dialect] Ep. form οὐκί [ῐ] is used by Hom. mostly at the end of a clause and at the close of the verse, ὅς τ' αἴτιος ὅς τε καὶ οὐκί Il.15.137
; ἠὲ καὶ οὐκί 2.238
, 300,al.; but in the middle of a verse, 20.255; οὐχί [ῐ] is found twice in Hom., Il.15.716, 16.762, and is common in Trag., where it is freq. employed like οὔ emphatic (supr. B),
τί δ' οὐχί
; A.Ag. 273
,Fr. 310;
πῶς δ' οὐχί
; Id.Supp. 918
, Ar. Pax 1027; ἐμὸς μὲν οὐχί E.IA 859
: also in Prose, Th.1.120,al., 1 Ep.Cor. 5.12, etc.: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου ( ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr., IG12.10.22, etc.; in iv B.C. rarely written οκ, ib. 22.1635.112,116,121; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid.s.v. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον.

H ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): Arist.SE 166b6, referring to Il.23.328 τὸ μὲν ου (i.e. οὐ = οὒ) καταπύθεται ὄμβρῳ, says λύουσι.. τῇ προσῳδίᾳ λέγοντες τὸ ου ὀξύτερον (i.e. οὗ), cf. 178b3. In codd. the word is written oxytone when folld. by a pause (v. supr. B), and is usu. written without any accent in other cases.

I οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὐ
37 πάσχω

πάσχω, Il.20.297, etc.: [tense] impf.

A ἔπασχον 17.375
, etc.: [tense] fut. πείσομαι Od.2.134
, etc. ; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3sg. παισεῖται Abh.Berl.Akad.1925(5).21
(Cyrene, iii B.C.): [tense] aor. ἔπᾰθον Il.9.492
, etc.: [tense] pf. πέπονθα Od.13.6
, etc.: [tense] plpf. ἐπεπόνθειν ib.92, etc.; [dialect] Att. ἐπεπόνθη Pl.Smp. 198c
(all the above tenses in Hom., [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. only in Hes.). —Rarer forms, [ per.] 2pl. [tense] pf. πέπασθε (so Aristarch.) Il.3.99, πέποσθε Od. 23.53
; fem. [tense] pf. part. πεπᾰθυῖα 17.555
; [dialect] Dor. [tense] pf. πέποσχα Stesich. 89
, Epich.11, PCair.Zen. 482.18 (iii B.C.) :— have something done to one, suffer, opp. do, ὅσσ' ἔρξαν τ' ἔπαθόν τε Od.8.490
; ῥέζοντά τι καὶ παθεῖν ἔοικεν Pi.N.4.32
; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, v. δράω ; πολλὰ μὲν.. πείσεσθαι, πολλὰ δὲ ποιήσειν Hdt.5.89, etc.: hence used as [voice] Pass. of ποιέω (cf. Arist. Cat. 2a4, Metaph. 1017a26, Plot.3.6.8, etc.), π. τι ὑπό τινος to be treated so and so by another, suffer it at his hands, ἃ πάσχοντες ὑφ' ἑτέρων ὀργίζεσθε, ταῦτα τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ ποιεῖτε Isoc.3.61
, cf. Hdt.1.44, 124,al. ; ἐξ ἐμοῦ μὲν ἔπαθες οἷα φῂς παθεῖν, δρᾷς δ' οὐδὲν ἡμᾶς εὖ E.Hec. 252
; οἷα πρὸς θεῶν πάσχω θεός A.Pr.92
, cf. Hdt.1.36.

II to have something happen to one, to be or come to be in a state or case, καί τι ἔφη γελοῖον παθεῖν Pl.Smp. 174e
; ὅπερ οἱ τὰς ἐγχέλεις θηρώμενοι πέπονθας Ar.Eq. 846
, cf. V. 946 ; ὁρᾶτε μὴ ταὐτὸ πάθητε τῷ ἵππῳ see that it be not with you as with the horse in the fable, Arist. Rh. 1393b20, cf. Pl.R. 488a ; παραπλ ήσιον π. ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ .. Isoc.1.27 ; ὁμοιότατον πεπονθέναι ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις .. Pl.Phd. 98c.

2 of the influence of passion or feeling, to be affected in a certain way, be (or come to be) in a certain state of mind, οἱ Καμαριναῖοι ἐπεπόνθεσαν τοιόνδε Th.6.88
, cf. 1.80, D.20.56 ; ὅ τι μὲν ὑμεῖς πεπόνθατε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν κατηγόρων οὐκ οἶδα Pl.Ap. 17a
, cf. 21c, 22c, Alc.1.118b, Smp.198c ; π. τι πρός τινας Isoc.2.42
, Pl.Grg. 485b, cf. X.Smp.4.11, 8.15, etc. ; τι ἔς τινας Th.6.11
: sts. with Adj., ὑϊκὸν πάσχει he is swinishly disposed, X.Mem.1.2.30 : abs., ὁ πάσχων the man of feeling or impulse, ὁ μὴ πάσχων the un impassioned man, Arist.MM 1203b21.

3 of things, πεπόνθασι.. αἱ Ἰώνων ὁρταὶ τοῦτο this is the case with.., Hdt.1.148 ; πάσχει δὲ ταὐτὸ τοῦτο καὶ τὰ κάρδαμα this is just the way with.., Ar.Nu. 234 ; οἷον τὰ γράμματα πεπονθότ' ἂν εἴη Pl.Sph. 253a
; ὁμοίως π. τῷ Νείλῳ to be in the same case with.., Hdt.2.20.

4 Gramm., of words, to be subject to certain changes, EM 200.11, 491.2, etc. ; τὸ πεπονθός a modified form, A.D.Adv.137.16.

b to be passive in meaning, Id.Synt. 244.6,al.

III freq. with Advbs., κακῶς πάσχειν or παθεῖν to be in evil plight, unlucky, Od.16.275, Hdt.3.146, etc. ; κακῶς π. ὑπό τινος to be ill used, ill treated by.., A.Pr. 1041 (anap.) ; ἐκ Διὸς π. κακῶς ib. 759 (but also κακὸν π. ὑ. τ. Th.8.48): freq. with an Adj., κακά, αἰνά, λυγρὰ π ., Il.3.99, 22.431, Hdt.9.37 ; ἀνάρσια πρός τινος Id.5.89
: freq. in Trag., π. δύσοιστα, τάλανα, ἀμήχανα, οἰκτρά, σχέτλια, ἀνάξια, A.Eu. 789 (lyr.), Th. 988 (dub.), E.Hipp. 598, Hec. 321, Andr. 1180 (dub.), IA 852 : also in Prose, δεινά, βίαια π., D.51.19, 21.1, etc. ; πρέποντα πάσχειν Anti-pho 3.3.9 : in Hom. also with Subst., ἄλγεα, κήδεα, πήματα, ἀεκήλια ἔργα, Il.20.297, Od.17.555, Il.5.886, 18.77 : rarely in [dialect] Att., πράγματ' αἴσχιστ' ἂν ἐπάθομεν D.21.17
.

b εὖ πάσχειν to be well off, in good case, c. gen., τῶν αὑτοῦ (leg. ὧν αὐτοῦ, cf. ὅς Possess.) κτεάνων εὖ πασχέμεν to have the good of, enjoy one's own, like ἀπολαύω, γεύομαι, etc., Thgn. 1009, cf. Pi.N.1.32 ; εὖ πάσχειν receive benefits, opp. εὖ δρᾶν, A.Eu. 868, Th.2.40, etc. ; ἀνθ' ὧν ἔπασχον εὖ.. χάριν δοῦναι S.OC 1489
; τιμᾶσθαι.. ἐν τῇ μνήμῃ τῶν εὖ πεπονθότων Aeschin.3.182
; εὖ παθεῖν ὑπό τινων Pl.Grg. 519d
, etc.: also with an Adj., π. ἀγαθά Hdt.2.37
; τι ἐσλόν Pi.P.9.89
, cf. Alc.Supp.22.5 ; τερπνόν τι S. Aj. 521
, cf. Theoc.7.83 ; χαρτά, ὅσια, E.Ph. 618, Hec. 788 ; γλυκέα, χαρίεντα π., Ar. Pax 591, Ec. 794 ; δίκαια Din.1.10
; φιλικὰ ὑπό τινος X.Cyr.4.6.6
.

2 without Adv., with reference to evil, used for κακῶς or κακὰπ., μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον καὶ πόλλ' ἐμόγησα Od.5.223
, cf. Il. 23.607 ; εἴ κεν μάλα πολλὰ πάθοι 22.220
; ὁτιοῦν π. suffer anything whatever, Isoc.12.133, etc.: abs., παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω by hard experience, Hes. Op. 218, cf. S.OT 403 ; ὁ παθών the injured parly, Pl. Lg. 730a, 878c :—Phrases: μή τι πάθῃς or πάθοι, lest thou, lest he suffer any ill, Od.17.596, Il.5.567, cf. 11.470, etc. ; μή τι πάθωμεν 13.52
: hence εἴ τι πάθοιμι or ἤν τι πάθω, as euphemism, if aught were to happen to me, i.e. if I were to die, Callin.1.17, Hdt.8.102, Ar.Ec. 1105, V. 385, Lys.19.51, Theoc.8.10 ; ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11
; ἐάν τινα ἀνθρώπινα πάσχῃ IG3.74.13
; so εἴ τι πείσεται.. ἅδε γᾶ E.Ph. 244
(lyr.) ; ἤν τι ναῦς πάθῃ Id.IT 755
, cf. Syngr. ap. D.35.13.

b in Law, suffer punishment, pay the penalty, Lys.20.30 ; π. ὡς ἱερόσυλος SIG 1016.7
(Iasos, iv B. C.), cf. 1 Ep.Pet.4.15 ; ὡς προδότης καὶ ἐπιβουλεύων τῷ δήμῳ πασχέτω τι Aen. Tact.11.9 ; τιμᾶν ὅ τι χρὴ παθεῖν.. ἢ ἀποτεῖσαι Pl.Plt. 299a
(- τίνειν codd.), cf. Ap. 36b, X.Mem.2.9.5, IG12.65.50, etc.

3 τί πάθω ; what is to become of me? ὤμοι ἐγώ, τί π. ; Il.11.404, Od.5.465, S.OC 216 (lyr.), Theoc.3.24 ; sts. what (else) am I to do? Ar.Nu. 798 ; so esp. τί γὰρ π. ; E.Hec. 614, Supp. 257, Ar.Av. 1432, etc. ; ὡμολόγηκα· τί γὰρ π. ; I allow it—how can I help it? Pl.Euthd. 302d, cf. Hdt.4.118.

4 in [ per.] 2sg., τί πάσχεις ; what's the matter with you? Ar.Nu. 708, Av. 1044 ; τί χρῆμα πάσχεις ; Id.Nu. 816 : so in [tense] aor. part., τί παθών ; τί παθόντε λελάσμεθα θούριδος ἀλκῆς ; what possesses us that we have forgotten.. ? Il.11.313 ; but τί παθόντες γαῖαν ἔδυτε ; what befell you that you died ? Od.24.106 ; also οὐδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἔπαθεν.. πεισθείς no wonder that he was induced, Antipho 2.4.7.

5 to be ill, suffer, c. acc. of the part affected, π. τοὺς πόδας, τὴν πλευράν, PSI4.293.23 (iii A. D.), PGen.56.27 (iv A. D.) : abs. in part., ὁ πάσχων, almost = ὁ κάμνων, the patient, PMag. Par.1.3017 ; μεταβαίνει ἀπὸ τῶν παθῶν ἐπὶ τοὺς πάσχοντας ἀνθρώπους Gal.16.583
, cf. 15.501, Sor.Fasc. 45, al.

IV in later Stoic Philos., πάσχειν is to be acted upon by outward objects, take impressions from, them, opp. ἀποπάσχω, mostly folld. by ὅτι, to be led to suppose that.., Arr.Epict.1.2.3, 1.18.1, etc.: also c. acc., have experience of, ἀρετήν, λόγον, Ph.2.449, 1.121. (Πṇ θσκω, [tense] fut. Πένθ-σομαι, cf. πένθος.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πάσχω
38 που

που, [dialect] Ion. [full] κου, [dialect] Aeol. [full] ποι Sapph.Supp.25.17, Pi.P.5.101, BCH37.157 (Cyme, iii B.C.), prob. in Alc.9:—enclit. Adv.

A anywhere, somewhere, Il.16.514, etc.; freq. with other Advs. of Place, οὐχ ἑκάς π. somewhere not far off, S.Ph.41; πέλας π. ib. 163(anap.); μηδαμοῦ.. π. ib. 256 (dub.l.); π. πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ X.An.4.3.3
; ἄλλοθί π. D.4.41
; τῇδέ π. Plb.3.108.3
, etc.: c.gen., ἀλλά π. αὐτοῦ ἀγρῶν in some part there of the fields, Od.4.639; ἐμβαλεῖν π. (fort. ποι) τῆς χώρας some part of the country, X.Cyr.6.1.42; εἴ π. τῆς χώρας ταὐτὸ τοῦτο πάθος συνέβη D.18.195
.

II without reference to Place, in some degree, καί πού τι Th.2.87
: freq. to qualify an expression, perhaps, I suppose, Hom., etc.; added to introductory Particles, οὕτω π... Il.2.116
; Ζεὺς μέν π. τό γε οἶδε 3.308
; ὡς ὅτε π. 11.292
; ἤν π., εἰ μή π., X.Hier.3.2, Pl.R. 372a: strengthd., τάχ' ἄν π. S.OT 1116
; ἴσως π. E. El. 518
: attached to single words to limit their significance, πάντως κ. Hdt.3.73
; τί π. δράσεις; what in the world? A.Pr. 743; οὐδείς π. Pl.Phlb. 64d
; with numerals, ἔτεα τρία καὶ δέκα κ. μάλιστα about thirteen years, Hdt.1.119, cf. 209,7.22, etc.: οὔ τί που denies with indignation or wonder, surely it cannot be.., οὔ τί π. οὗτος Ἀπόλλων Pi.P.4.87
, cf. S.Ph. 1233, Ar.Nu. 1260, Pax 1211, Ra. 522, Pl.R. 362d, etc.; οὐ δήπου adds a shade of suspicion, οὐ δήπου Στράτων; Ar.Ach. 122
, cf. Av. 269, Pl.Smp. 194b: for δήπου, ἦπου, v. sub vocc.—In late writers ( LXX Jo.2.5, al., Ev.Jo.7.35, al., Arr.Epict.1.27.9, 4.1.93, etc.) ποῦ, που take the place of ποῖ, ποι, with Verbs of motion, as in Engl. where for whither? This idiom (condemned by Phryn.30, ποῦ ἄπει.. ἁμάρτημα) is found occasionally in early authors, ποῦ τοι ἀπειλαὶ οἴχονται; Il.13.219
; ἐξελθών που Antipho 2.4.8
; ἰόντα που X.Cyr.1.2.16
; but in pure [dialect] Att. only as f.l. for ποῖ, ποι.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > που
39 σκοπέω

σκοπ-έω, used by early writers only in [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. [voice] Act. and [voice] Med. (v. infr. 11), the other tenses being supplied by σκέπτομαι (q.v.):—but in later writers we find [tense] fut. σκοπήσω, Anon.Prog. in Rh.1.615 W., Gal.UP3.10 (f.l.), ([etym.] ἐπι-) Babr. 103.8, ([etym.] κατα-) Hld.5.4: [tense] aor.

A ἐσκόπησα Thphr.Sign.1
([etym.] προ-), Plb. Fr.54 (s.v.l.) ([etym.] περι-), Lib.Or.12.28, etc.: and of [voice] Med., [tense] aor. ἐσκοπησάμην ([etym.] περι-) Luc.VH1.32: [tense] pf. ἐσκόπημαι ([etym.] προαν-) J.AJ17.5.6: (cf. σκέπτομαι):—behold, contemplate (rather of particulars than of universals, of which θεωρέω is more commonly used, but οἱ τὸν ἥλιον ἐκλείποντα θεωροῦντες καὶ σκοπούμενοι Pl.Phd. 99d
), ἄστρον Pi.O.1.5
; πλοῦν μὴ 'ξ ἀπόπτου μᾶλλον ἢ 'γγύθεν σκοπεῖν S.Ph. 467
, cf. E.IA 490; τὰ πόρρω Id.Rh. 482
; τὰ ἔμπροσθεν X.An.6.3.14(17)
; examine, inspect, καταθεῖναί τι.. σκοπεῖν τῷ βουλομένῳ IG 12(5).480
(Athenian law, v B.C.); σ. παραγραφάς PLips. 38 ii 2
(iv A.D.): abs., ἄλλοσε ς. S.El. 1474; σκοπεῖτε look out, watch, A.Supp. 232, etc.: folld. by a clause, σ. ὅπου.. S.Ph.16
; σ. ποῦ.. X.Cyr.3.2.1
, etc.: folld. by a Prep., σ. εἰς.. E.Fr.812.6
, Pl.Plt. 305b.

2 metaph., look to or into, consider, examine, τὰ ἑωυτοῦ ς. look to one's own affairs, Hdt.1.8; τὸ σεαυτοῦ Pl.Phdr. 232d
; τὸ ὑμέτερον Antipho 4.2.8
; καιρόν Th.4.23
; τὸ συμφέρον Pl.R. 342b
sq.; τὸ πρὸς ποσί S.OT 130
; τοὺς νόμους πρὸς τοὺς τῇδε with reference to the laws here, Pl.Ti. 24a; τι πρὸς ἐμαυτόν Id.Euthphr.9c
: abs., σκοπῶν εὕρισκον ἴασιν S.OT68
, cf. Ph. 282: folld. by an acc. and interrog. clause, or μή.., σ. τὴν τελευτὴν κῇ ἀποβήσεται Hdt.1.32
, cf. S.Ph. 506, OT 407: folld. by an interrog. clause alone, σ. πόθεν χρὴ ἄρξασθαι And.1.8
; σ. εἰ.. S.Ant.41
, Pl.Lg. 862a ([voice] Med.); ὅπως.. X.Cyr.2.2.26
: sts. c. gen. pers. as well as acc. or clause, σκόπει δὴ τόδε αὐτῶν Pl.Tht. 182a
; πρῶτον αὐτῶν ἐσκόπει πότερα.. X.Mem.1.1.12
: folld. by a Prep., ἐξ ὧν ἀγγέλλουσι σκοποῦντες λογιεῖσθε τὰ εἰκότα Th.6.36
, cf. 1.1, X.An.3.1.13; πρὸς τὸ ἄρχειν σκοπῶν λογίζομαι Id.Cyr.1.6.8
; σ. τὰ λοιπὰ πρὸς ὑμᾶς αὐτούς Antipho 1.31
; ἀνομολογούμενοι πρὸς ἀλλήλους Pl.R. 348b
; τόδε περὶ αὐτοῦ ib. 351b, etc.; τὴν ὀρθολογίαν περί τι Id.Sph. 239b
: with Adv., abs., ὀρθῶς ς. E.Ph. 155; καιρίως Id.Rh. 339
; ἄμεινον Pl.Smp. 219a
.

3 look out for, παῦλαν X.An.5.7.32
; τι ἀγαθόν Id.Hier.9.10
; νεώσοικον Ar.Ach.96
; ἐσκόπει γυναῖκά μοι Is.2.18
, cf. D.Ep.2.11; σ. ὄνομα κάλλιον αὐτῇ Plu.2.991f
.

II [voice] Med., used like [voice] Act. 1.1 (perh. implying a more deliberate consideration), c. acc., E.IT 68, Hel. 1537; τένοντ' ἐς ὀρθὸν ὄμμασι σκοπουμένη Id.Med. 1166
.

2 = 1.2, S.OT 964; σ. τύχας βροτῶν E.Fr. 262
: folld. by relat., σ. τίνι τρόπῳ.. Pl.Smp. 176b
, cf. Th.8.48: περί τινος Pl.Prt. 353a
, X.Hier. 1.10: abs., ἔνεστι τοῖσιν εὖ σκοπουμένοις ταρβεῖν.. S.Tr. 296
.

3 = 1.3, ὅτανπερ ἀδικεῖν ἐπιχειρῶσιν, ἅμα καὶ τὴν ἀπολογίαν σκοποῦνται Isoc.21.17
.

III rarely in [voice] Pass., σκοπῶν καὶ σκοπούμενος ὑπ' ἄλλων considering and being considered, Pl.Lg. 772d; ὁ λόγος.. αἰσχρὸς τοῖς σκοπουμένοις is disgraceful in the very matter considered, D.20.54 (s.v.l., τοῖς ς. secl. Dobree).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σκοπέω
40 σταθμός

σταθμός, ὁ, in Trag., etc., with heterocl. pl. σταθμά, S.Ph. 489, OT 1139, E.HF 999, X.Eq.4.3, etc.; σταθμοί however occurs not only in Hom. (v. infr.), but in E.Andr. 280, Or. 1474 (both lyr.):—

A standing-place for animals, farmstead, steading, τὼ μὲν (the lions) ἄρ', ἁρπάζοντε βόας καὶ ἴφια μῆλα, σταθμοὺς ἀνθρώπων κεραΐζετον Il.5.557
, cf. 12.304; κατὰ σταθμοὺς δύεται 5.140
; κατὰ σ. ποιμνήϊον 2.470
; σταθμῷ ἐν οἰοπόλῳ 19.377
, cf. Hes.Th. 294; sts. including the human dwelling, Od.14.504; of a swineherd's steading, ib.32; of a sheepstation, Il.5.140, 18.589, cf. E.Rh. 293; of the stable of the griffin of Oceanus, A.Pr. 398; of a deer's lair, Arist.HA 578b21, 611a20.

2 of men, dwelling, abode, Pi.O.5.10 (pl.), P.4.76 (pl.); Ἀΐδα Id.O.10
(11).92; οὐρανοῦ Id.I.7(6).45
; Εὐβοίας σταθμά S.Ph. 489
, cf. PCair.Zen.344.2 (iii B.C.), BGU1185.13 (i B.C.), etc.

3 quarters, lodgings for travellers or soldiers, Hdt.7.119, X.An.1.8.1, al., SIG880.15 (Pizus, iii A.D.), etc.; soldier's billet, PStrassb.92.4 (iii B.C.), etc.

4 quarter of a town, PRyl.102.8 (ii A.D.).

5 in Persia, of stations or stages on the royal road, where the king rested in travelling, σ. βασιλήϊοι Hdt.5.52
, cf. 6.119, Plu.Art.25: hence in reference to Persia, of distances, a day's march (about 5 parasangs or 150 stades), X.An.1.2.10; posting-station in the desert, σ. καὶ φρούρια OGI701.13
(Egypt, ii A.D., pl.).

6 station for ships, E.Rh.43 (lyr.), Lyc. 290.

II upright standing-post, freq. in Hom.; sts. of the bearing pillar of the roof, παρὰ σταθμὸν τέγεος Od.1.333
, 8.458, 18.209; παρὰ σ. μεγάροιο 17.96
, cf. 22.120, 257: in pl., E.IT49; also doorpost, Od.4.838, 17.340: pl., ἀργύρεοι σ. ἐν χαλκέῳ ἕστασαν οὐδῷ 7.89
, cf. 10.62, Il.14.167, Hdt.1.179, S.El. 1331, E.Or. 1474 (lyr.): later, pl. σταθμά in this sense, Id.HF 999, Ar.Ach. 449, IG22.1672.70, 173, 42(1).103.94 (Epid., iv B.C.); σ. θυράων Theoc.24.15
: σταθμός alone, = threshold, door, LXX4 Ki.12.9, al.

III ( ἵστημι A.
IV) balance, γυνὴ.. σταθμὸν ἔχουσα Il.12.434
; ἱστᾶσι σταθμῷ πρὸς ἀργύριον τὰς τρίχας weigh them against silver, Hdt.2.65; ἐπὶ τὸν σ. ἀγαγεῖν Ar. Ra. 1365
; ἐς τὸν σ. ἐμβάς ib. 1407; ἕλκειν ς. weigh so much, Hdt.1.50, cf. Eup.116.

2 weight, σίτου ς. Hdt.2.168; σ. ἔχοντες τριήκοντα τάλαντα Id.1.14
; διαφέρειν ἐν τῷ ς. Hp.Aër.1: abs., in acc., ἀναθήματα ἴσα σταθμὸν τοῖσι.. equal in weight to.., Hdt.1.92; ἡμιπλίνθια σταθμὸν διτάλαντα two talents in or by weight, ib.50; Βαβυλώνιον σταθμὸν τάλαντον a talent, Babylonian weight, Id.3.89, cf. Th.2.13; ᾧ πλείω παρὰ τὸν ς. excess resulting from difference of standard, PCair.Zen.782 (a).141 (iii B.C.); μυρίος χρυσοῦ ς. E.Ba. 812; σ. [θύννου] ἦν τάλαντα ιε' Arist.HA 607b32
; νόμισμα.. ὁρισθὲν μεγέθει καὶ σταθμῷ Id.Pol. 1257a39
.

3 fixed standard of health, Hp.VM 9, Steril.230.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σταθμός

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Reference (C++) — In the C++ programming language, a reference is a simple reference datatype that is less powerful but safer than the pointer type inherited from C. The name C++ reference may cause confusion, as in computer science a reference is a general… … Wikipedia
Reference work — This article is about a kind of publication. Reference work may also refer to the work that librarians perform at a library reference desk. A reference work is a compendium of information, usually of a specific type, compiled in a book for ease… … Wikipedia
Reference range — Reference ranges edit in: blood urine CSF feces In health related fields, a reference range or reference interval usually describes the variations of a measurement or value in healthy i … Wikipedia
Reference ranges for blood tests — Reference ranges edit in: blood urine CSF feces Reference ranges for blood tests are sets of values used by a health professional to interpret a set of … Wikipedia
Only Built 4 Cuban Linx... — Only Built 4 Cuban Linx... Studio album by Raekwon Released August 1, 1995 … Wikipedia
Reference software — is software which emulates and expands upon print reference forms including the dictionary, translation dictionary, encyclopedia, thesaurus, and atlas. Like print references, reference software can either be general or specific to a domain, and… … Wikipedia
Reference.com — URL reference.com Type of site Encyclopedia, Dictionary, Thesaurus Available language(s) English, Spanish … Wikipedia
Only Fools and Horses — Title screen Genre Sitcom Created by John Sullivan … Wikipedia
Reference News — (Simplified Chinese: 参考消息, Traditional Chinese: 參考消息, Pinyin: Cānkǎo Xiāoxī), first published on November 7, 1931, is a newspaper daily which has the largest circulation in mainland China with 3 million.[1] It is published by Xinhua News Agency.… … Wikipedia
Only Visiting This Planet — Studio album by Larry Norman Released 1972 Recorded AIR Studio … Wikipedia
Only Jerks and Horses — is a short comedy sketch written by David Walliams and Matt Lucas, as their alter egos, Mash Peas . It parodies the BBC sitcom Only Fools and Horses and American sitcoms in general by imagining a US remake of the show. It forms part of a series… … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

reference+only

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

reference+only

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: